JP2014195575A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent aleatory spirit from increasing more than necessary by preventing a game from being executed while possibility of a specific game state has been stocked.SOLUTION: Before satisfaction of start conditions (for example, in start winning), it is determined whether a display result of variable display of a presentation pattern becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern) on the basis of predetermined information (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for variation pattern type determination) by read-ahead determination. Then, based on the read-ahead determination result, a holding advance notice presentation is executed. In this case, the holding advance notice presentation is performed at specific timing (for example, in occurrence of start winning). When a second holding storage has been stored at specific timing, performing of the holding advance notice presentation is limited. Also, the holding advance notice presentation is performed by executing light emission control by using a rear light guide plate 505b.

Description

  The present invention provides a first variable display means or a second start area for starting variable display of the first identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the start condition being satisfied after the game medium passes through the first start area. The display result derived and displayed in the second variable display means for starting the variable display of the second identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the start condition being satisfied after the game medium passes through When the display result is obtained, control is performed to a specific gaming state, and the variable display of the second identification information relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that is executed in preference to the variable display of the first identification information.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display section based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “hit (specific game state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  This type of gaming machine usually determines immediately whether or not to make a big hit or reach based on the start winning when the game ball starts to win in the start winning opening provided in the game area. Instead, each random number value is read out at a timing when the variable display based on the start winning can be started, and it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or reach.

  On the other hand, in such a gaming machine, before executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition (start winning prize), it is determined in advance whether each random number value is pre-read and a specific display result is obtained, and a predetermined notice effect is provided. Some are configured to run. For example, in Patent Document 1, it is determined in advance whether or not a big hit is made at the timing of the start winning prize, and a hold display is displayed in a different manner from a normal state such as a present box or a bomb at the start winning timing, By changing the display mode of the hold display from the present box to the mode in which the object appears at the timing of digesting the memory and shifting the hold display, or by changing from a bomb to a large peach, in the example shown in Patent Document 1, It is described that the holding notice effect) is executed.

JP2011-182819 (paragraph 0347-0370, FIG. 23-27)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a plurality of variable display means are provided and variable display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the hold storage is stored in the second hold storage means. If the predetermined notice effect for the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means is executed in a state in which the game is held, there is a possibility that the hold memory stored in the first hold storage means may enter a specific game state. There is a possibility that the variable display of the second identification information is digested in a state where it is recognized that it exists. Then, there is a possibility that the game is executed in a state where the possibility of the specific game state is stocked, and there is a possibility that the gambling will be higher than necessary.

  Therefore, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine that prevents a game from being executed in a state where the possibility of a specific gaming state is stocked, and prevents the gambling ability from becoming higher than necessary. And

(Means 1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start condition is satisfied after the game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13) (for example, the first special The variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is started based on the fact that neither the variable display of the symbol nor the second special symbol is executed and the game state is not a big hit gaming state, and the display result is displayed. Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the game medium passes through the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) or the second start area (for example, the second start winning port 14) for derivation display. The display result derived and displayed in the second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) for starting the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result is determined in advance. Et When a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is reached, control is performed to a specific game state (for example, jackpot game state), and variable display of the second identification information is executed in preference to variable display of the first identification information. (For example, in the game control microcomputer 560, by executing steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed), which is light transmissive A light guide plate (for example, front light guide plate 505a, rear light guide plate 505b), a light emitter (for example, display LEDs 62a, 62b) provided so that light can enter from an end surface of the light guide plate, and a first start area Predetermined information (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, randomness for variation pattern type determination) for variable display of the first identification information for which the start condition is not yet established even though the medium has passed ) In the first upper limit number (for example, 4) as the reserved storage and the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer), and the game medium still passes through the second starting area Second variable storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) for storing predetermined information as reserved storage for the variable display of the second identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied, up to the second upper limit number, and the start condition Before the determination is made, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first identification information becomes the specific display result based on the predetermined information (for example, step S1217A in the game control microcomputer 560) ) And the determination result of the pre-start determination means, the specific timing (for example, the timing at which the start winning is generated, the reserved memory is digested, and the hold display is shifted. Predetermined notice effect execution means for executing a predetermined notice effect (for example, a hold notice effect) in the variable display that is started before the variable display of the first identification information subject to the determination is executed at the timing of For example, the light guide plate reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end face of the light guide plate by the light emitter. When the reflection part (for example, reflection part 510a-510c, 511) made to radiate | emit to the front of this is provided and the predetermined | prescribed notice production | presentation execution means has the hold memory memorize | stored in the 2nd hold memory means in specific timing, The execution of the predetermined notice effect is limited (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the result of step S6008 and subsequent steps is N in step S6006. Without transitioning to the reason, do not start the hold notice effect), as a predetermined notice effect, a light emitting effect that emits light to the front of the gaming machine from the reflector provided on the light guide plate by causing the light emitter to emit light (for example, (Light guide plate effect) is executed (for example, the portion of steps S6012A and S6514A in the effect control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state in which the reserved memory based on the passage of the game medium through the first start area is stocked with the possibility of the specific game state, and the gambling Can be prevented from becoming higher than necessary.
Note that “restrict the predetermined notice effect” refers to the reserved storage corresponding to the start winning (passage of the game medium to the first start area or the second start area) that occurred within the restriction period of the predetermined notice effect. In addition, both the concept of not setting the predetermined notice effect at all and not executing the predetermined notice effect and the concept of delaying the start timing of the predetermined notice effect are included. Furthermore, the concept of “restricting the predetermined notice effect” includes prohibiting the predetermined notice effect from being retroactively performed on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display that is already being displayed. It also includes delaying the start timing.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the first state in which the game medium easily passes through the second starting area (for example, the open state of the variable winning ball device 15) and the second state in which the game medium is less likely to pass than in the first state. The start area control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 in the normal symbol process process of step S27) that is controllable to the state (for example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed) is opened or closed. A portion to be controlled to the state) and a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect (for example, a predetermined effect) for notifying that the second start area is controlled to the first state (for example, step in the effect control microcomputer 100) And a predetermined notice effect executing means for notifying that the second start area is controlled to the first state. (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not shift to the processing after step S6008 and does not start the pending notice effect when Y is determined in step S6005). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state where it is recognized that there is a possibility that the reserved memory stored in the first reserved memory means may enter a specific game state. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the predetermined notice effect executing means can execute the predetermined notice effect when the number of the reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means decreases (for example, effect control). The microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step S6513). According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the predetermined notice effect is executed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the pre-start determination means is based on a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13). Then, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S1217A), and the predetermined advance notice effect executing means includes: In the case where the hold storage is stored in the second hold storage means when the determination whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific display result is executed by the pre-start determination means, 2 The predetermined notice effect is implemented based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the reserved storage means is not stored in the reserved storage means (for example, the reserved display is shifted by digesting the stored storage). (For example, when the determination control microcomputer 100 determines N in step S6006, it executes step S6513 to start the hold notice effect at the timing of using the hold memory (shifting the hold display)). May be. According to such a configuration, by delaying the execution timing of the predetermined notice effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the predetermined notice effect while preventing the gambling performance from becoming higher than necessary, and to improve the interest in the game. Can be made.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the second reserved storage means based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13). Is provided with a hold memory determination means (for example, in step S6006 in the production control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment), and the pre-start determination means When the hold memory determining means determines that the hold memory is stored in the second hold memory means, the specific condition is satisfied after the hold memory is not stored in the second hold memory means. (For example, shifting the hold display by digesting the hold memory) determines whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first identification information becomes the specific display result. (For example, in the second embodiment, when it is determined as N in step S6006, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S6510a at the timing of digesting the hold memory (shifting the hold display) to determine the prefetching. May be configured). According to such a configuration, by delaying the determination timing by the pre-start determination means, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the predetermined notice effect while preventing the gambling from becoming higher than necessary, and to enhance the interest in the game. Can be improved.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and the first identification information based on the information from the game control means And an effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) for executing an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, an effect symbol variable display), and the game control means stores the first hold memory. Storage information for transmitting the number of reserved memories stored in the means and the second reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved memory number addition designation command, a second reserved memory number addition designation command). Transmitting means (for example, a part for executing steps S1220A and S1220B in the game control microcomputer 560) and pre-start determining means Determination result information transmitting means (for example, a part for executing steps S1218A, S1219A, S1218B, S1219B in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting determination result information (for example, symbol designating command, variation category command) indicating the determination result; The effect control means includes a predetermined notice effect restricting means (for example, restricting execution of the predetermined notice effect when at least one of the stored storage information and the determination result information cannot be normally received) When the result control microcomputer 100 is N in step S6003 or N in step S6004, the process may not be shifted to the processing after step S6008 and the hold notice effect is not started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined announcement effect from being erroneously executed without being based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means, and to prevent the reliability of the predetermined announcement effect from being lowered. it can.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the predetermined notice effect executing means restricts execution of the predetermined notice effect by prohibiting execution of the predetermined notice effect (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). May be configured not to provide the hold notice effect (2) (see steps S660C and S662C) and to prevent the hold notice effect from being retroactively executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming higher than necessary by completely prohibiting the execution of the predetermined notice effect.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the display unit from diagonally forward, (b) is a perspective view which shows the state seen from diagonally back. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. (A) is a front light-guide plate, (b) is a rear light-guide plate, (c) is a principal part enlarged view which shows a dot pattern, (d) is an expanded sectional view which shows a dot pattern. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of an upper frame. (A) is a top view of a condensing lens, (b) is a front view of a condensing lens, (c) is AA sectional drawing of (a), (d) is BB sectional drawing of (a). is there. (A) is a principal part enlarged plan view which shows an upper frame, (b) is CC sectional drawing of (a), (c) is DD sectional drawing of (a). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a display unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of FIG. It is EE sectional drawing of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold notice effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold notice effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation notice determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation notice effect process (2). It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display return process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in case a hold notice production is restricted. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in case a hold notice production is restricted. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in case a hold notice production is restricted. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a predetermined production. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port switch passage process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding notice effect process (1) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding notice effect process (2) in 2nd Embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in a 3rd embodiment from the front. FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing a state in which a glass door frame is opened in the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 68. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the movable aspect of a movable LED unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the movable aspect of a push button. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding notice effect process (1) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding notice effect process (2) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding notice effect process (2) in 4th Embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  A display unit 550 is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display unit 550 is provided with an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of loss and red in the case of a big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is 5R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit). The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  In addition, a predetermined effect execution area 9 </ b> F for executing a predetermined effect described later is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first reserved memory display unit 9a for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 9b for displaying the second reserved memory number are provided. Yes. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are individually displayed is shown. However, the sum is the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays a pending | holding memory | storage number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. Moreover, when comprised in that way, while a 1st hold | maintenance memory and a 2nd hold | maintenance memory are displayed side by side in order of winning to the 1st start winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14, in the total holding storage display part, So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) or a super reach effect is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 78 may be operated in a pseudo-series effect, for example, not limited to the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect.

  Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. The effect blade roles 79a and 79b operate, for example, when a notice effect (effect blade effect notice effect) is executed. In addition, not only the effect blade role notice effect but also the effect blade role 79a, 79b may be operated in a pseudo-ream effect or a super reach effect, for example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, with the exception of the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. .

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, a special symbol display). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that variable display execution conditions in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is always shifted to the probability change state. However, when the big hit is made, the game may be shifted to a so-called short-time state in addition to the probability change state. A machine may be configured. In this case, the high base state may be shifted even in the short time state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  Next, the structure of the display unit 550 will be described. 2A is a perspective view showing a state in which the display unit is viewed obliquely from the front side, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view showing a state in which the display unit is viewed from the diagonally rear side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. 4A is a front light guide plate, FIG. 4B is a rear light guide plate, FIG. 4C is an enlarged view of a main part showing a dot pattern, and FIG. 4D is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the dot pattern. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the upper frame. 6A is a plan view of the condenser lens, FIG. 6B is a front view of the condenser lens, FIG. 6C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 6A, and FIG. It is B sectional drawing. 7A is an enlarged plan view of a main part showing the upper frame, FIG. 7B is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 7A, and FIG. 7C is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 8 is a longitudinal sectional view showing the display unit. FIG. 9 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main part of FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG.

  In the following description, the vertical and horizontal directions will be described with reference to the case where the display unit 550 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the display unit 550 is formed by integrally assembling the effect display device 9 and the display device 500 disposed on the front side of the effect display device 9. The effect display device 9 is attached to the front surface of an attachment member 502 provided with attachment brackets 501a and 501b for attachment to the gaming machine 1 on the left and right sides. The display device 500 is disposed so as to cover the front side of the display area of the effect display device 9, and is attached to the mounting member 502 via the locking claws 503a to 503c protruding from the upper side and the lower side toward the back side. It is locked to.

  The display device 500 includes a light guide plate 505 including a front light guide plate 505a and a rear light guide plate 505b having translucency that can transmit light, and a display as a light emitter that is provided so that light can be incident on an end surface of the light guide plate 505. LEDs 62a and 62b (see FIG. 5) and display LEDs 62a and 62b which are provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 505 in a manner representing predetermined display information (see FIG. 4) and are incident on the inside from the end face of the light guide plate 505. Are disposed between the light guide plate 505 and the display LEDs 62a and 62b, and from the display LEDs 62a and 62b. The front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b that collect the incident light toward the light guide plate 505 side and collect it in the thickness direction and emit it toward the end face of the light guide plate 505. Comprising condensing lens 507 (see FIG. 5), a frame frame 504 formed into a square frame shape by a synthetic resin material having a non-translucent, are mainly composed.

  The frame body 504 is formed in a square frame shape by a left frame 504a and a right frame 504b, a lower frame 504c connecting the lower ends of the left frame 504a and the right frame 504b, and an upper frame 504d connecting the upper ends. ing. The left frame 504a, the right frame 504b, and the lower frame 504c are integrally formed in an upward U-shape, and the upper frame 504d is detachably attached to the upper ends of the left frame 504a and the right frame 504b with screws N1, Is provided to be openable.

  An insertion groove 508a into which the front light guide plate 505a is inserted and an insertion groove 508b into which the rear light guide plate 505b is inserted continuously on the inner side surfaces of the left frame 504a, the right frame 504b, and the lower frame 504c. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the light guide plate 505 can be inserted into the insertion grooves 508a and 508b from above and pulled out upward by removing the upper frame 504d as shown in FIG.

  Since the light guide plate 505 is detachably provided from the left frame 504a, the right frame 504b, and the lower frame 504c as described above, the light guide plate 505 can be easily replaced. When exchanging to another light guide plate 505 having different information, only the light guide plate 505 can be easily replaced.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front by a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension L3 {plate thickness (for example, 5 mm)}. Is formed. The light guide plate 505 is not necessarily transparent as long as it has translucency. For example, the light guide plate 505 may be colored or translucent.

  Reflecting portions 510a to 510c are formed on the back surface 505B of the front light guide plate 505a to reflect the light from the display LED 62a and emit the light from the front surface 505F (see FIG. 4A). The reflective portion 510a is formed to represent the characters “Large”, the reflective portion 510b is represented as “Hi”, and the reflective portion 510c is represented as “Li”. The left region, the middle region, and the right region obtained by dividing the front surface 505F into three equal parts in the horizontal direction. It is arranged to fit in each.

  Further, on the back surface 505B of the rear light guide plate 505b, there is formed a reflection portion 511 for reflecting the light from the display LED 62b and emitting it from the front surface 505F (see FIG. 4B). The reflection part 511 is formed in a mode like a group of flowers.

  Therefore, the reflection portions 510a, 510b, 510c and the reflection portion 511 are arranged at positions where the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are overlapped in the front-rear direction in a state of being inserted into the frame frame body 504.

  As shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D, the reflecting portions 510a to 510c and 511 have an uneven state in which the sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided through the light guide plate 505 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. (Rough surface). Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface 505B of the light guide plate 505 by a stamper or injection. For example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an acrylic plate, You may comprise a reflection part by the sticking dot system which affixed the reflecting plate with the dot-shaped adhesive material, a groove processing system, etc.

  In this embodiment, the reflection portions 510a to 510c and 511 on the back surface 505B of the light guide plate 505 are uneven portions having a substantially triangular wave shape in cross section in the light traveling direction, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the reflecting portions 510a to 510c and 511 can be variously modified as long as they form a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front surface 505F, such as a substantially semicircular cross section. 4 (a) and 4 (b), these reflecting portions 510a to 510c and 511 are represented as characters or designs surrounded by a frame, but actually there is no frame, and the dots and the like Characters and designs are formed by the gathering.

  In this embodiment, characters and pictures are exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 505, but other display information including decorations such as symbols, patterns, or patterns is also included. Can be displayed. Hereinafter, an effect of displaying characters and designs by the light guide plate 505 is referred to as a light guide plate effect. In this embodiment, the light guide plate effect is executed when the hold notice effect is executed or when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the light guide plate effect is not limited to the case shown in this embodiment, for example, at the time of super reach, at the time of execution of the moving object notice effect, at the time of execution of the predetermined effect, during the big hit game state, after the big hit game It may be executed at an arbitrary timing during the special symbol change in addition to during the base state.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the upper frame 504c is formed with a pair of front and rear lens grooves 512a and 512b extending in the left-right direction and penetrating in the up-down direction. The lens grooves 512a and 512b are arranged side by side with a central wall portion 513 therebetween, and are formed in a tapered shape so that the front and rear width dimension gradually decreases from the upper side to the lower side. In addition, a pair of front and rear locking claws 517a and 517b facing the lens grooves 512a and 512b are provided at the left and right ends of the wall portion 513, and the condensing lens 507 fitted in the lens grooves 512a and 512b is provided. The upper end is locked to restrict upward movement.

  In addition, a concave substrate placement portion 515 into which the LED substrate 514 provided with display LEDs 62a and 62b on the lower surface can be fitted is formed in the upper surface opening of the upper frame 504c. By disposing the LED substrate 514 on the substrate disposition portion 515, the display LEDs 62a and 62b are disposed opposite to the upper surface openings of the front and rear lens grooves 512a and 512b, and screws N2 attached to the left and right end portions thereof are screwed. The LED substrate 514 can be fixed by screwing into the holes 516a and 516b.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the front lens 507 a and the rear lens 507 b are formed in a horizontally long plate shape by a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic or polycarbonate, and are along the upper end surface 505 H of the light guide plate 505. Extending between the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505 and the display LEDs 62a and 62b (see FIG. 10).

  Specifically, a plurality of substantially semicircular convex portions 518 bulging downward in front view are continuously arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction on the lower sides of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b. Each convex portion 518 is formed corresponding to each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b, and the front surface of each convex portion 518, that is, the lower surface facing the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505 in the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b. The end surface 507L (outgoing surface) constitutes a plurality of curved surfaces (lens surfaces).

  Note that the plurality of convex portions 518 are not limited to one-to-one correspondence with display LEDs, and for example, a plurality of convex portions 518 (lens surfaces) corresponding to two or more LEDs (light emitters) may be provided. Further, although the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b are configured by a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 518, a plurality of display LEDs 62a and 62b arranged in parallel along the upper end surface 505H. Correspondingly, a plurality of condensing lenses formed separately from each other may be provided.

  On the upper sides of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b, a plurality of curved bulges 519 that bulge slightly upward in a front view are continuously formed in the longitudinal direction. Each bulging portion 519 is formed corresponding to each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b, and the top surface of each bulging portion 519, that is, the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b is opposed to the display LEDs 62a and 62b. The end surface 507H (incident surface) constitutes a plurality of curved surfaces (lens surfaces). Note that the curved upper end surface 507H has a smaller curvature than the curved lower end surface 507L and is formed so as to swell slightly.

  The front-rear width dimension L1 (plate thickness) of the lowermost portion of the lower end surface 507L of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b is shorter than the front-rear width dimension L2 (plate thickness) of the uppermost portion of the upper end surface 507H. (L1 <L2). The front-rear width dimension L1 of the lower end surface 507L is substantially the same as the front-rear width dimension L3 of the light guide plate 505 (L1≈L3), and the front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H is the light emitting surface of the display LEDs 62a and 62b. The front-rear width dimension L4 of 62c (see FIG. 9) is formed to be approximately the same dimension.

  The front surface 507F constitutes a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines toward the lower end surface 507L from the upper end surface 507H, and the rear surface 507B is a flat surface that inclines toward the lower front surface from the upper end surface 507H toward the lower end surface 507L. It constitutes a simple inclined surface. That is, since the front surface 507F and the back surface 507B form inclined surfaces that are gradually inclined toward each other from the upper end surface 507H toward the lower end surface 507L, the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b are arranged from the upper end surface 507H to the lower end surface. It is formed in the shape of a substantially inverted letter C in the longitudinal section in which the plate thickness gradually decreases toward 507L.

  Therefore, the front-rear width dimension (plate thickness) of the lower end surface 507L of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b becomes shorter as it approaches the lowest part of each convex part 518, and the front-rear width dimension L1 becomes minimum at the lowest part. . In this embodiment, short non-inclined surfaces 507Fa and 507Bb that are parallel to each other are provided between the upper end surface 507H and the inclined surface.

  Hook pieces 520a and 520b are formed at the left and right ends of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b, and are locked from above by ribs (not shown) provided in the upper frame 504d, and in the lens grooves 512a and 512b. Is supposed to be retained.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the thus configured front lens 507a and rear lens 507b are inserted from above into the front and rear lens grooves 512a and 512b from the upper surface opening of the upper frame 504d. Then, the upper end surface 507H is inserted until it is positioned at substantially the same height as the upper surface openings of the lens grooves 512a and 512b, and the hook pieces 520a and 520b are locked to the ribs (not shown), A concave groove portion into which the light guide plate 505 is inserted is formed at a position slightly above the lower surface opening of the lens grooves 512a and 512b.

  Actually, when the upper frame 504d is connected between the upper ends of the left frame 504a and the right frame 504b, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are inserted into the lower portions of the lens grooves 512a and 512b. In this manner, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are inserted into the lower portions of the lens grooves 512a and 512b, so that the upper end surfaces 505H of the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b and the lower end surfaces of the front lens 507a and the rear lens 507b. 507L faces the lens grooves 512a and 512b with a predetermined gap therebetween. As described above, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b are fitted into the lower portions of the lens grooves 512a and 512b, thereby preventing the positional deviation between the upper end surface 505H and the lower end surface 507L in the front-rear direction.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 7C, a space is formed between the lower end surface 507L and the upper end surface 505H because the lower end surface 507L is formed as a curved surface by the convex portion 518. The space is sealed by the non-transparent wall surface of the upper frame 504d constituting the lens grooves 512a and 512b, so that the light emitted from the lower end surface 507L is incident on the upper end surface 505H without leaking to the surroundings. The In addition to the example shown in this embodiment, in order to obtain the same effect, for example, the upper end surface 507H and the upper end surface 505H may be formed to be concave or processed into a knurled shape. .

  As shown in FIG. 8, the display device 500 configured in this way is assembled on the front side of the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 2). In the state assembled on the front side, the frame frame 504 surrounds the display area of the effect display device 9, and the pair of front and rear light guide plates 507 cover the entire display area of the effect display device 9.

  In addition, the rear light guide plate 505b is disposed on the front side with a predetermined gap (for example, about 20 mm) from the display area of the effect display device 9, and the front light guide plate 505a is predetermined with respect to the rear light guide plate 505b. It arrange | positions on the front side through a clearance gap (for example, about 15 mm). The gap width can be changed variously. Alternatively, the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b may be disposed in contact with each other.

  In addition, the effect display device 9 and the display device 500 are configured separately and are detachably assembled with each other so that the effect display device 9 and the display device 500 are integrated. Since it can be assembled or removed from the gaming machine 1, not only the workability is improved, but also the relative position between the effect display device 9 and the display device 500 does not shift when assembled to the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the replacement operation of the effect display device 9, the front and rear light guide plates 507, and the display LEDs 62a and 62b can be performed separately in a state of being separated from each other. Further, the display device 500 includes the light guide plate 505, the LED substrate 514, the condenser lens 507, and the like integrated with each other via the frame frame body 504. Therefore, the workability is improved, and the relative positional relationship of each member is changed by the removal by replacement so that the light emission display is not adversely affected.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the display device 500 is arranged on the upper side of the front light guide plate 505 a in a state where the condenser lens 507, the LED substrate 514, and the light guide plate 505 are integrally assembled to the frame frame 504. A front lens 507a is disposed along the front lens 507a. A plurality of display LEDs 62a are arranged in the longitudinal direction above the front lens 507a, and a rear lens 507b is disposed along the upper side of the rear light guide plate 505b. A plurality of display LEDs 62b are juxtaposed in the longitudinal direction above the lens 507b. That is, the condenser lens 507 is disposed between the light guide plate 505 and the display LEDs 62a and 62b.

  Specifically, in the condenser lens 507, the lower end surface 507L faces the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505, and the upper end surface 507H faces the light emitting surface 62c of each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b. In addition, each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the individual upper end surface 507H and lower end surface 507L corresponding to each convex portion 518.

  The front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H and the front-rear width dimension L4 of the light emitting surface 62c are substantially the same (L2≈L4), and there is no deviation in the front-rear direction between the light emitting surface 62c and the upper end surface 507H. Light emitted from the light emitting surface 62c is incident on the upper end surface 507H without being diffused in the front-rear direction. Further, the front-rear width dimension L3 of the upper end surface 505H is substantially the same as the front-rear width dimension L1 near the lowest part of the lower end surface 507L (L3≈L1), and the deviation in the front-rear direction between the upper end surface 505H and the lower end surface 507L is As a result, the light emitted from the lower end surface 507L is incident on the upper end surface 505H without being diffused in the front-rear direction.

  Further, a predetermined gap (for example, about 1 to 3 mm) is provided between the lowermost portion of the lower end surface 507L and the upper end surface 505H and between the upper end surface 507H and the light emitting surface 62c of the display LEDs 62a and 62b. It is done. Thereby, the condensing lens 507 and the light guide plate 505 are prevented from being damaged by vibration generated when the gaming machine is transported or used.

  Next, the light guide state of the emitted light from the display LEDs 62a and 62b will be described.

  The outgoing light emitted from each of the display LEDs 62a and 62b enters the upper end surface 507H of the condenser lens 507. Here, since the front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H and the front-rear width dimension L4 of the light emitting surface 62c are substantially the same dimension (L2≈L4), the emitted light from the display LEDs 62a, 62b diffuses in the front-rear direction. Without being incident on the upper end surface 507H. Further, since the left and right width of the upper end surface 507H is longer than the left and right width of the light emitting surface 62c, the light diffused in the left and right direction is substantially incident on the upper end surface 507H.

  Incident light that enters the condenser lens 507 from the upper end surface 507H is guided toward the light guide plate 505 below. Although the LED light has high directivity, the incident light is diffused radially in the left-right direction by being incident through the upper end surface 507H formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface. Similarly, when passing through the lower end surface 507L formed as a curved lens surface, the light is refracted and emitted downward vertically (see FIG. 10).

  As a result, the light emitted from the display LEDs 62a and 62b having high directivity can be diffused radially to some extent in the left and right directions by the condenser lens 507 to widen the light emitting region, and the left and right directions on the lower end surface 507L can be expanded. Since light emitted from different positions is guided vertically downward and does not spread radially, only the vertically downward regions corresponding to the display LEDs 62a and 62b can be caused to partially emit light.

  Further, the incident light that has entered the condenser lens 507 from the upper end surface 507H is guided toward the lower light guide plate 505, and repeatedly undergoes total reflection in the front-rear (plate thickness) direction. (See FIG. 9), and finally exits from the lower end surface 507L having a shorter front-rear width than the upper end surface 507H.

  In this way, the light from the display LEDs 62a and 62b can be collected without being diffused in the front-rear width (plate thickness) direction and guided to the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505, so that attenuation of light is suppressed. . In particular, even when the front-rear width dimension L4 of the light emitting surface 62c of the display LEDs 62a, 62b is larger than the front-rear width dimension L3 of the upper end surface 505H (L4> L3), the light from the display LEDs 62a, 62b is front-rear. Since the light can be guided to the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505 without being diffused in the width (plate thickness) direction, the light from the display LEDs 62a and 62b is prevented from being diffused to the surroundings.

  Although not specifically shown, for example, even when a plurality of display LEDs 62a and 62b are arranged in the front-rear width direction, the front-rear width dimension L2 of the upper end surface 507H is expanded according to the display LEDs 62a and 62b, thereby Without being diffused into the upper end surface 507H. Therefore, even when the front and rear width dimension of the light emitting area of the display LEDs 62a and 62b is larger than the front and rear width dimension L3 (plate thickness) of the light guide plate 505, the light emitted from the display LEDs 62a and 62b is guided in the thickness direction while guiding the emitted light. The light can be condensed and incident on the light guide plate 505.

  The light emitted from the lower end surface 507L enters the upper end surface 505H of the light guide plate 505, and is guided downward while repeating total reflection by the front and rear surfaces. And when it reaches | attains reflection part 510a-510c, 511, an incident light is reflected toward the front side by the reflective surface formed of the recessed part, and from a player, each reflection part 510a-510c is reflected. When the portion corresponding to 511 is emitted by reflected light, display information such as predetermined characters and characters is displayed.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 11 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 53 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 53 has a numeric data update range selection / setting function (initial value selection / setting function and upper limit selection / setting function), numeric data update rule selection / setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided on the display board 62a corresponding to the front light guide plate 505a, the display LED 62b corresponding to the rear light guide plate 505b, and the game board via the lamp driver board 35. Display control of the decorative LED 25 provided and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is performed, and sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 12 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED and the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side. Further, a current is supplied to the display LED 62a corresponding to the front light guide plate 505a, the display LED 62b corresponding to the rear light guide plate 505b, and the like.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output) Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 gives a display result designation command designating the display result (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. It transmits to (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 22). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 53 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 53 to update the random R value.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S27, the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is won, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big hit that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a probable state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, it is preferable to provide a sudden probable big hit that does not involve the high base state only by shifting to the high probability state. . However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of the super reach when the high probability / low base state is set at the time of the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. In the case of providing a sudden probability variation jackpot with a high probability / low base state, the probability of all variations display is high until the variation display for the 71st rotation is terminated after the jackpot game with the sudden probability variation jackpot is terminated. / Because it is in the state controlled to the low base state, the ratio of super reach becomes high in all the change displays until the probability variation state ends. Therefore, in the case of providing a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, the ratio of the super reach in the high probability / low base state is not necessarily increased every time, but the super reach is achieved. You may make it provide the time of raising a ratio, and the time of not raising (it is a normal ratio). In addition, for example, instead of looking at the gaming state (for example, whether or not a high probability flag or a high base flag is set), the number of variable displays after the big hit game is counted, and the 71st variable display is obtained. Only occasionally you may increase the percentage of superreach. With such a configuration, when a sudden probability change big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state is provided, after the big hit game by the sudden probability change big hit is finished, the super reach of each time the change display until the probability change state ends It is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate is continuously increased.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, re-variation is performed three times when using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-continuous. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 15, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the re-variation is performed once when the normal PB2-3 is used among the variation patterns which are used when sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and which has a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation per unit, 10R probability variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, normal CA3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and normal reach And normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, and super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 14, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 17 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 17 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 17A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and also to a high base state, There are two cases: a case where only the probability state is transferred and a state where the high base state is not transferred (ie, the low base state). Is used in the probability variation big hit determination table, and in other cases the normal big hit determination table is used. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a high probability state and a high base state after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 71 times. However, after the big hit, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times, and is shifted to the low base state, and only the high probability state is continued until the variable display is ended 71 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit, from the end of the 70th fluctuation display to the end of the 71st fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is transferred. There may be a certain probability change state (which is a low base state).

  FIGS. 17B and 17C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 17B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 17B and 17C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 53 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 17A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 17D and 17E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 17D determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 17E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the stored memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “15R probability variable big hit”, This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, eight determination values are assigned to the “sudden probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, two judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, a sudden probability variation big hit as a first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value There are cases where 15 rounds of probability variation big hit “15R probability variation big hit”, 10 rounds probability variation big hit “10R probability variation big hit” and 2 rounds probability variation big hit “2R probability variation big hit” as the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given. In addition, there is a case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the game value to be given is shown in this embodiment. The number of rounds is not limited. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, the types of big hits include “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 10 rounds, and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in this implementation. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 7-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. Instead, for example, five or more types of jackpot types may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than four types, for example, only two types of jackpot types may be provided.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “10R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 10-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high base The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variation big hit” is a big hit that allows only two (2 rounds) opening of the big prize opening as in the case of “sudden probability variation big hit” described later. The opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (29 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, in the case of “suddenly promising big hit”, which will be described later, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the big winning opening during the big hit game, but in the case of “2R probable big hit”, the big winning Although the number of times the mouth is opened is small, it can be expected that the game ball will win the big prize mouth during the big hit game.

  The “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times that the big winning opening is less than “15R probability change big hit” or “10R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” have a long opening time of 29 seconds per round, whereas “sudden probability variation big hit” takes one round. The opening time of the winning jackpot is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a winning prize during the big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the high probability state and is also changed to the high base state. (See S166 to S169). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits as in this embodiment, when a small hit is provided, only sudden transition with high base state without high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide it (the opening pattern of the big prize opening is also the same for the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit). However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of becoming super reach when executing the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. When it is configured to provide a probable big hit, when the ratio of super reach is not necessarily increased every time in the 71st fluctuation display, but when the ratio of super reach is increased or not increased (the normal ratio is maintained) And a variation pattern may be selected with the same selection ratio / selection method as in the low probability / low base state in the high probability state after suddenly probable big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate of super reach becomes permanently high in the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values that are compared with a random 1 value and correspond to "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", and "sudden probability variation big hit", respectively. Judgment value (big hit type judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  18A to 18C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 18A used when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, and when the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”. 18B is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 18B in the assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, in this embodiment, when “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” is used, the variation pattern type determination is performed. If the value of the random number (random 2) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 10R / 2R probability variation jackpot and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and super reach In addition, a variation pattern type that does not involve pseudo-continuations is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is suddenly probable big hit state, the big hit state with 15R probable big hit, 10R probable big hit or 2R probable big hit The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of control.

  FIG. 18D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 19A to 19D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 19A shows the variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 19B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 19C shows a variation pattern for loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of the big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the probability variation state. A type determination table 135C is shown. FIG. 19D shows a high probability / low base state in which the gaming state is in a probabilistic state (the state from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit). Shows a variation pattern type determination table 135D for loss used in the case of The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D, in this embodiment, even when the probability variation state is present, if the last 71st variation display is performed after the big hit, the previous time is displayed. Compared to the case where the 70th variation display is performed, the variation pattern with super reach is selected more frequently. By doing so, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit of the player at the end of the probability variation state is performed by performing the super reach variation display with a high probability in the last variation display where the probability variation state ends. The feeling is heightened. Not only the last 71th variation display, for example, increasing the ratio of super reach from the variation display of the predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, 5 times before) to the last variation display, etc. Super reach variation display may be performed with high probability over a plurality of variation displays.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit, the high probability state continues until the 71st variation display ends, and the high base state continues until the 70th variation display ends. Thus, in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the case where the high probability / low base state is controlled is shown, but the high base state is continued until the 71st variation display is completed. In the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state, the high probability / high base state may be controlled. However, if controlled in this way, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment are selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag in the variation pattern setting process, as will be described later. (Refer to Steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). However, since the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state remains in the high probability / high base state, the state of the flag is confirmed in this way. It becomes impossible to select the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D. Thus, in the case of controlling to the high probability / high base state even in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter, which will be described later, are confirmed, and the counter value If the remaining is once, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is selected. If the counter value is still 2 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation is selected. Good.

  Further, when the ratio of the super reach is increased from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last fluctuation display, for example, a high probability number described later at the end of the big hit Set the counter and the high base number counter to 75 times (for example, set both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter to 75, and the high probability / high base state until 75 times of variable display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75 and the high base count counter is set to 70. From the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display, the high probability / low It is also possible to control to the base state.In the case of controlling to the high probability / low base state from the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display. In this case, according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag (step S95, S96, S100, S101))) At the start of the variable display, whether or not the value of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter is within a predetermined number (for example, 5) or not (the remaining number of probability variation states) Is within a predetermined number), and if it is within a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for detachment with an increased super reach ratio shown in FIG. 19D. If the counter value is still greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the deviation variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. It may be selected to 135C. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether or not the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss may be selected (the probability change state is ended). For example, the configuration may be configured in such a manner that the selection ratio of the super reach is increased only once in the last variation display. For example, the counter value for counting the number of variations after the big hit game is 71, for example, In such a case, the shift variation pattern type determination table 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 19C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when jackpot is determined) / (when jackpot is determined and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2- 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 19B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  20A and 20B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo-ream. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 20B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 20B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 15, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H).

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small In the case of “hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (A002 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game with “15R probability change big hit”, “10R probability change big hit”, or “2R probability change big hit” is ended. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the hold memory information, an effect control command (first hold memory number addition designation indicating that the hold memory number has increased or decreased for the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively). Command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the following types of reserved memory Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and in the one command, which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is increased (The first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in the one command, it is specified which of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is increased, and the total number of the hold storage is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Designate which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won as the hold storage information (whether the first hold storage or the second hold storage has increased). In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data for transmission.

(4) Designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the hold memory information In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The increased reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number among the winning determination results. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 31), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designation command and when setting a display result designation command.

  FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-described variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 18 (A) to (D) and FIGS. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined at the start winning that it becomes “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether or not 1 to 74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 18 and 19), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of variation display that is actually executed. For this reason, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3 is selected, a pending notice effect, which will be described later, is provided as a predetermined notice effect for the change display determined at the time of winning. Is executed. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 (specifically, the variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  Note that the “predetermined notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. In this embodiment, as the predetermined notice effect, a notice effect (a hold notice effect to be described later) that is immediately executed at the timing when the start winning for the variable display to be noticed occurs is executed (however, as described later, Even if a new start prize is generated, the hold notice effect is limited, and the hold notice effect may be executed at the timing when the hold memory is consumed and the hold display is shifted).

  In addition, as the predetermined notice effect, the effect is started from the change display that is started after the start winning for the change display to be notified is generated, and a plurality of times before the change display that is the target of the notice effect is started. Notice effect continuously executed over various fluctuation displays (for example, a mode in which chance chances are stopped over a plurality of fluctuation displays and the display screen is flashed (also referred to as “change in fluctuation pattern during symbol fluctuation”) Or a mode in which the mode is changed in such a manner that the background screen crawls over a plurality of variation displays (also referred to as “mode transition”), a mode in which countdown is performed over a plurality of variation displays ( A continuous notice effect) (also referred to as “countdown”) may be executed. However, in this case, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of fluctuating displays. For example, the notice effect is displayed only once in the fluctuating display before the fluctuating display targeted for the notice effect is started. You may do it. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. Further, it is not always necessary to continuously execute the display over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time. However, regarding the continuous notice effect in the “countdown” mode, if the countdown is only once or intermittent, the effect becomes unnatural, so it is desirable to perform continuously over a plurality of variable displays.

  In this embodiment, a case where a start winning to the first start winning port 13 occurs in the high base state, or a case where a start winning to the first start winning port 13 occurs during the big hit game. Except for this (see steps S1215A and S1216A), a winning determination process is executed each time a start winning is generated, and a symbol designation command shown in FIG. 24 is transmitted and a variable category command shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is transmitted. Is done. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute the hold notice effect to give notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are used as the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  27 and 28 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 39), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. Further, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 29 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passage process that is executed when the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first It is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4) (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 30B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 30, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit number (first upper limit number) of the first reserved memory number and the upper limit number (second upper limit number) of the second reserved memory number are both the same 4. The first upper limit number and the second upper limit number may be different numbers. For example, while the first upper limit number is 3, the second upper limit number may be 5.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where random numbers such as jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer as reserved storage, but the predetermined information stored as the reserved storage is It is not limited to random values. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a high base flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1220A. If the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a winning presentation effect process is executed to determine in advance the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected winning winning is executed at the time of starting winning (step S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S1220A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. In addition, when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is not executed, the determination result at the time of winning is set as a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified (for example, “FF (H)”) as EXT data. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the process of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. Winning effect processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216A is executed, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S1217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S1217A and the winning effect processing may be executed in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after it is notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is in a state in which the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S305) to the big hit end processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the aggregated reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 53 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 30B) ( Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start winning prize is received at the second start winning opening 14 and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1217B is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  Also in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1215A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed in the high base state. That is, only when the base state is low, the winning effect process in step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A hold notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach will be executed during the change display of effect symbols by 100.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If the 15R probability variation big hit, the 10R probability variation big hit, the 2R probability variation big hit, or the sudden probability variation big hit occurs before, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (the first winning determination table shown in FIG. 17B). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217B is executed), the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 17C (for the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability variation big hit, a 10R probability variation big hit, a 2R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation may change from a normal state to a probability variation state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is determined.

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is 89 or less (ie, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79 may be determined. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y of step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 26). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect process in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. Also, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1217B is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “10R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “2R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when determining that “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 74 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “15R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 38 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command which comprehensively indicates that a variation pattern type of a big hit or small winning may be transmitted. . Then, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 does not show which variation pattern type is specifically shown, but the variation shown to be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a hold notice effect described later may be executed.

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the second special symbol is displayed with priority, as shown in this embodiment, in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 31, the big hit determination random number (random R) Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed and not compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed) However, the processing of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved memory number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in this order. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation is started, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares a big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 17) determined in advance with a big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the big hit determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 17A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 17A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 17A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (71 in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 17B and 17C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variable big hit”, “ "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “10R positive variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “2R probability variable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “2R probable big hit” is decided, “3” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “10R probability variation big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and if “15R probability variation big hit” is decided, “9” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. . When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 18 (A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 18D as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). Note that the high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in Step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (Step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 19A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 19B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 19D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, a high probability / high base state is established), and the CPU 56 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 19C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 19C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 21). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 19C) used in a high probability / high base state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 19B), a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 19A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the processing of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 20) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 21) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 19) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 19). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not it will be reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to configure so as to perform a hold notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 22) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Specifically, whether or not it is “10R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “2R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). Specifically, whether or not it is “2R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. When it is neither “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (that is, when “sudden probability variation big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command. This is performed (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S1122, which will be described later, for example. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), Control for transmitting a jackpot start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot” is the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (the jackpot type (Data stored in the buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15R probability variation big hit” is 15 times. “10R probability variation big hit” is 10 times. (In this case, twice.) Is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In this case, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit and the case of 2R probability variation big hit, although the same two times are set as the number of rounds, different round times are set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 2R probability change big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Note that 29 seconds is set as the round time even in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 10R probability variation big hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-payment opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of a high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by 1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145 as it is.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and “sudden probability sudden big hit” Is transmitted with a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag to shift the gaming state to the high probability state (step S166). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 71 times) in a high probability number counter for counting the number of times of display of fluctuation in the high probability state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts the gaming state to the high base state (step S168). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in a high base number counter for counting the number of times of change display in the high base state (step S169).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S166 to S169, the high probability / high base state is transitioned to after the big hit game ends, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display is terminated 70 times. Then, after the end of the big hit, the transition to the high probability / low base state is made from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display, and when the 71st variation display ends, the gaming state is in the normal state Return to.

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a hit, If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In addition, in the case of a configuration that can be controlled even in the normal symbol variation state with an increased probability of winning the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol, the high base flag determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Also used to determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S170).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 22 and 23) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  42 to 45 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designating command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received symbol designating command as the first free winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 46, an area (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number is secured in the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second start port switch passing process of FIG. 29, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is shown. When there is a start winning at the winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number) within one timer interruption Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a storage area is provided so that a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command can be associated with each other Is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command within one timer interrupt. If the command reception is normally performed, the command is transmitted as shown in FIG. Thus, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command are stored in this order (in FIG. 46, the commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5). Examples stored are shown).

  Each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 46 is an effect symbol variation start process, which will be described later, at the timing at which the effect symbol variation display is started each time the effect symbol variation display is started. In step S6515, the data is deleted sequentially. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the storage area 5 storing the second reserved memory (second reserved memory number addition designation command (C100 (H)) The stored contents of () are stored) are deleted. Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, so that it is stored in the first storage area 1 at the timing when the display of the effect symbol is started next. The contents of the command storage area at the start winning prize are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 46, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 3, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  In this embodiment, the command received at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the command received at the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 are stored in a common start winning command storage area. However, in this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and it is not necessary to manage the winning order. A first start winning command storage area for storing commands received at the time of starting winning and a second starting winning command storage area for storing commands received at the start winning prize to the second start winning opening 14 are separately provided. You may comprise as follows.

  In addition, in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 46, the storage area 2 shows an example in which a command cannot be normally received and a variable category command is missed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 46, in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area, the content of the second storage area where the variable category command is originally stored remains “0000 (H)”. The state is shown.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, a command for starting winning (design designation command, variable category command, and reserved storage number addition designation command) stored in the starting winning command storage area shown in FIG. 46 is used. Based on the above, the hold notice effect is set in the hold notice effect process (1) (see step S800B) and the hold notice effect process (2) (see steps S660C and S662C). If the specified command, variable category command, and reserved memory count addition specification command) are missed or inconsistent, the hold notice effect will be displayed until the change display of the hold memory corresponding to the command at the start winning prize is exhausted. Limited. In the following description, the period until the stored memory in which a command is missed or inconsistency occurs during the start winning, in which the hold notice effect is restricted, is also referred to as a hold notice restriction period.

  In this embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is completely prohibited with respect to the hold memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent in the start winning prize, or the hold memory that has won the start prize within the hold notice restriction period. However, the present invention is not limited to the case shown in this embodiment. For example, regarding the hold memory that won the start prize within the hold notice limit period, when the hold notice that the hold notice effect was restricted and the hold memory where the inconsistency occurred and the hold notice limit was released and the hold notice limit period was canceled The display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold storage may be changed to start the hold notice effect retrospectively.

  Also, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, if a predetermined effect is being executed, or if a movable object notice effect is being executed, a super reach effect is In the case where the second hold symbol is being displayed, the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the hold notice effect is not started immediately (in this case, as described later, When the memory is consumed (when the hold display is shifted), the hold notice effect can be started retroactively). In the example shown in FIG. 46, when a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, during execution of a predetermined effect, during execution of a movable object notice effect, during execution of a super reach effect, the second reserved memory If the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is not immediately started due to the existence of the second special symbol or the change display of the second special symbol, the storage area corresponding to the hold memory (FIG. 46). In the example shown in FIG. 5, the value of the determination postponement information in the storage area 4) is set to “1” indicating that the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed.

  In this embodiment, “restricting the hold notice effect” means that the hold notice effect is not set at all for the hold memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the hold notice restriction period. And the concept of delaying the start timing of the hold notice effect. Furthermore, the concept of “restricting the hold notice effect” prohibits execution of the hold notice effect retroactively to the hold memory corresponding to the hold display that is already being displayed, It also includes delaying the start timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when a new command is stored in the start winning command storage area, the undetermined information in the storage area in which the new command is stored becomes “1”. Is set. Undetermined information is information indicating that it is still unprocessed in a hold notice effect process (1) (see step S800B) and a hold display return process (see step S8114) described later. The undetermined information is set to “1” when a new command is received, and thereafter, the command is processed in the hold notice effect process (1) (see step S800B), or the hold display return process (see step S8114). ) Is cleared to “0” when the command is processed. In this embodiment, the undetermined information is set to “1” when the symbol designation command is stored in step S652 if there is no missing symbol designation command.

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command received when the start prize is generated are also referred to as a start prize command when they are comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, a reserved memory number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also referred to as reserved storage information. In addition, a symbol designation command which is a command indicating whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning effect processing at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 31), a determination result of the big hit type, a determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654). However, if a variable category command or a pending storage count addition specification command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command is stored, it will be received before the variable category command within the current timer interrupt. This means that you have missed the symbol designating command. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM, and the undetermined information of the storage area. Is set to “1”.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the storage area (step S656A). However, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) has already been stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command or variation category command is stored. In this case, it means that both the symbol designation command and the variation category command to be received prior to the first reserved memory number addition designation command have been missed within the current timer interrupt. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first reserved storage number addition designation command in the first storage area that is free in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step S656B).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the storage area (step S658A). However, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) has already been stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command or variation category command is stored. In this case, it means that both the symbol designation command and the variation category command to be received prior to the second reserved memory number addition designation command have been missed within the current timer interrupt. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second reserved memory number addition designation command in the first storage area that is free in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S658B).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S659), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S660A). Further, the production control CPU 101 erases one first on-hold display in the first on-hold storage display unit 9a, shifts the remaining first on-hold display after the erased first on-hold storage one by one, The first reserved memory number display in the one reserved memory display unit 9a is updated (step S660B). For example, when the 1st to 3rd 1st hold display of the 1st hold memory display part 9a is lit-up display, when the 1st hold memory number subtraction designation command is received, the 1st 1st hold display While erasing the first hold display, the first hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area, and the first hold display displayed in the third is displayed in the second display area. Shift to. Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold notice effect process (2) (step S660C).

  In this embodiment, when a hold notice effect is executed, a newly displayed hold display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode at a timing when a new start win occurs and a command at the start win is received. When the hold notice effect is immediately started, and after the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, the display mode of the hold display whose determination is postponed at the timing when the hold memory is digested (hold display is shifted) is usually set. There is a case where the mode is changed to a mode different from the mode and the hold notice effect is started retrospectively. In this embodiment, the process of determining and starting the hold notice effect at the timing when a new start prize is generated is referred to as the hold notice effect (1) (see step S800B), and the reserved memory is used (the hold display is shifted). The process of determining and starting the hold notice effect at the timing to perform is referred to as hold notice effect (2) (see steps S660C and S662C).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S662A). Further, the production control CPU 101 erases one second on-hold display in the second on-hold storage display portion 9b, shifts the remaining second on-hold display after the erased second on-hold storage one by one, The second reserved memory number display in the two reserved memory display section 9a is updated (step S662B). For example, when the first to third first hold display of the second hold storage display unit 9b is lit up and the second hold storage number subtraction designation command is received (this embodiment) Then, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, if there is at least one second reserved memory, the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received.) The first second reserved display Is deleted, the second hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area, and the second hold display displayed in the third is shifted to the second display area. . Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold notice effect process (2) (step S662C).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the effect control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, since the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both 0 and the variable display is not executed, it is stored. The first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are reset. By executing the process of step S665, the first control memory number or the second reservation memory erroneously generated by the addition or subtraction omission of the first reservation memory number or the second reservation memory number occurs in the production control microcomputer 100. Even in a state where the number is recognized, it is possible to reset the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number to return to the normal state by interrupting the reserved memory.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state ( Step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the high probability / high base state. The screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen with a red display color) (step S670). In addition, the production control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag and a high base state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / low base state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, , An orange display color background screen) (step S673). The effect control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag (step S674) and resets the high base state flag (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S679). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S680). The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the number of rounds during the big hit game by confirming the special winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can do.

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big winning opening (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big winning opening (step S682). Also, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the designated winning opening after opening special command opening storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined effect process for determining and executing a predetermined effect (step S800A).

  The “predetermined effect” is an effect for notifying the possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state (open state) in which a game ball can easily enter. In the predetermined effect process in step S800A, the effect control CPU 101 receives the change display result of the normal symbol based on, for example, the command indicating the start of change of the normal symbol and the change display result received from the game control microcomputer 560 ( It is determined whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an open state), and based on the determination result, the presence / absence of a predetermined effect is determined or control for executing the predetermined effect is performed. In this embodiment, specifically, when the effect of rotating the roulette is executed in response to the normal symbol fluctuation display in the predetermined effect execution area 9F, the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. In such a case, the display result of “◯” is stopped and displayed in the predetermined effect execution area 9F, and the display result of “X” is stopped and displayed in the predetermined effect execution area 9F when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not opened. Produce an aspect. In this embodiment, the predetermined effect is a notice of whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an open state, and is one of the notice effects.

  It should be noted that by executing the predetermined effect, not only the possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state where the game ball is likely to enter (open state), but also whether or not the reach effect is executed and whether or not the big hit You may make it alert | report the possibility of becoming. In this case, for example, instead of “O” and “X” as the display result of the predetermined effect, the display result of “Chance” or “Intense heat” may be stopped and displayed, and there is a possibility of reaching (in addition to super reach) Or the possibility of a big hit. Further, for example, the display result of “small” may be stopped and displayed to notify the possibility of a small hit.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold notice effect process (1) (step S800B).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbols is realized. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  48 and 49 are flowcharts showing the hold notice effect process (1) (step S800B). In the hold notice effect process (1) (a process of determining and executing a hold notice effect at the timing when the start winning is generated), the effect control CPU 101 first performs the non-display control for making the hold display described later in a non-display state. It is confirmed whether or not a pending non-display flag indicating that the program is being executed is set (step S6000).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, non-display control is executed when the movable object notice effect is being executed or when the super reach effect is being executed. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6000, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect is being executed. In such a case, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed so that the hold notice effect is not started immediately, and the hold notice effect is limited (in this case, a hold display return process described later is executed, thereby At the end of the notice effect or the super reach effect, the hold display is returned to the state in which the hold display is increased by the amount of the start winning that occurred during the non-display control).

  If the hold non-display flag is set (that is, if the hold display is in the non-display state), the processing is ended as it is. If the pending non-display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. (Step S6001). If there is no storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” (Y in step S6001), the process is terminated as it is.

  If there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” (N in step S6001), the effect control CPU 101 issues a command stored in the storage area in which the undetermined information is “1”. It is determined whether or not a hold notice setting restriction flag indicating that it is a process target and a hold notice restriction period is set (step S6002). If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6018.

  If the hold notice setting limit flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the current command to be processed at the start winning prize, and determines whether all the commands at the start winning prize have been received in order. Confirmation is made (step S6003).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as a command at the time of starting winning, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition designation) Command) will be received all at once within one timer interrupt, so the MODE data will be “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, And a command “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) should be stored (see FIG. 23). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that the command has been missed due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data and the command could not be received correctly. .

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) should be received in this order. Therefore, the MODE data is stored in the start winning command storage area in the order of “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”). It must be. Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. It can be determined that the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If it is determined that the received start winning command is not in order or part of it is missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017. When it is determined that all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the contents of the current design target symbol designating command and the variation category command match. (Step S6004). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Nevertheless, if the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 26) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a conflict.

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are not consistent, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017.

  By executing the processing of steps S6002 to S6004, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, the command at the start prize is not received or may not be received. In the case where there is a match, the hold notice effect is restricted (in this embodiment, execution of the hold notice effect is prohibited).

  In this embodiment, when any one of the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004 is determined to be N, the process proceeds to step S6017 and shifts to the pending notice restriction period. This is not the only case. For example, on the condition that it is determined as N in all the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004, the process may shift to step S6017 to shift to the pending notice restriction period.

  Further, it is not always necessary to provide all the two determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004 in the program, and the program may be configured to provide only one of the determination processes in steps S6003 to S6004. .

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command match, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed (step S6005). Whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a predetermined effect executing flag when executing the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect process in step S800A, and executing the predetermined effect in step S6005. This can be determined by checking whether the flag is set. If the predetermined effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S6021.

  When the predetermined effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (see steps S658B and S662A) is zero. Is confirmed (step S6006). If the second reserved memory number is not 0 (that is, if there is a second reserved memory), the process proceeds to step S6021.

  If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if there is no second reserved memory), the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (step S6007). Whether or not the second special symbol variation display is in progress can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (see step S628) is set. If the second special symbol variation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S6021.

  By executing the processing of steps S6005 to S6007, in this embodiment, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, a predetermined effect is being executed, or the second hold If there is a memory, and if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed so that the hold notice effect is not started immediately, and the hold notice effect is limited.

  For example, when the gaming state is the low base state, the pre-reading notice effect (in this example, the first holding memory is executed by executing the processes after step S6008 only for the first holding memory. On the contrary, when the game state is the high base state, the processing after step S6008 is executed only for the second reserved memory, and the second reserved memory is set as the target of notification. A pre-reading notice effect (in this example, a hold notice effect) may be executable.

  If the variation display of the second special symbol is not in progress, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process using a random number for determining the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the effect mode based on the change category command to be processed. To determine whether or not to execute the hold notice effect and the effect mode (step S6008).

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a hold notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute a hold notice effect and an effect aspect. As shown in FIG. 50, in the hold notice determination table, determination values are assigned to the no hold notice effect, the hold notice effect (blue), the hold notice effect (red), and the hold notice effect (rainbow), respectively. ing. The hold notice effect (blue) is a hold notice effect in a form in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a blue round display. Moreover, the hold notice effect (red) is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a red round display. Also, the hold notice effect (rainbow) is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a rainbow-colored round display. In this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the normal display mode (display mode when the hold notice effect is not performed), the hold display is displayed as a green round display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, when it is specified in the pending notice determination table that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type (specifically, command C600 (H) is received). The change category command specifies that the change pattern type is super CA2-7 (specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received), and the change category command indicates super CA3. The determination value is assigned only when it is specified that the variation pattern type is −3 (specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received). Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed only when the non-reach is out, the super reach is out, or the super reach big hit.

  In addition, not only the aspect shown by this embodiment, you may comprise so that non-reach out, super reach out, and a change notice category other than super reach big hit may be performed. In this case, for example, it may be configured to specify only whether or not to win a big hit based on the variable category command and to execute the hold notice effect according to the specification result.

  In FIG. 50, in this embodiment, with respect to the hold notice effect (red) and the hold notice effect (rainbow), determination values are assigned only when the super reach is lost or the super reach big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed in such a manner that the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a red or rainbow-colored round display, it is determined that the super reach is achieved. .

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit of the hold notice effect (rainbow) is the highest, and then the expectation level (reliability) for the big notice of the hold notice effect (red). The determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the hold notice effect (blue) is the lowest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, a case where the presence / absence of the hold notice effect is determined and the mode of the hold notice effect is determined collectively by a lottery process using one random number is shown. However, the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the mode of the hold notice effect may be determined in two stages by a lottery process using different random numbers. That is, first, only the presence or absence of the hold notice effect is determined by the lottery process using one random number, and when it is decided to execute the hold notice effect, the aspect of the hold notice effect is further determined by the lottery process using another random number. May be determined.

  In step S6008, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit game is being played, and if the big hit game is being played, it is desirable to decide not to forcibly execute the hold notice effect. Whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be executed even during the big hit game.

  If it is decided to execute the hold notice effect in any manner (Y in step S6009), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first hold memory number addition designation command as the processing target hold memory number addition designation command. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S6010). If the hold memory number addition designation command to be processed is the first hold memory number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first hold display on the first hold memory display unit 9a in the determined hold notice effect mode. Increase by one (step S6011). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the blue, red, or iridescent round display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a according to the determination result of step S6008. The hold notice effect is started. Then, control goes to a step S6012A. When step S6011 is executed and the hold notice effect is started, the display position of the first hold display to be notified is shifted one by one as the variable display is started and the first hold display is digested one by one. As a result, the first hold display subject to advance notice is finally digested and erased from the first hold storage display section 9a, thereby terminating the hold advance notice effect (see step S660B).

  When the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage count addition designation command (that is, when the command is the second pending storage count addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines the pending notice announcement effect that has been determined. In the aspect, the second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b (step S6012). Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control increases the blue, red, or iridescent round display as the second hold display by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b according to the determination result of step S6008. The hold notice effect is started. Then, control goes to a step S6012A. When step S6012 is executed and the hold notice effect is started, the display position of the second hold display to be notified is shifted one by one as the variable display is started and the second hold display is digested one by one. As a result, the second hold display to be notified is finally digested and deleted from the second hold storage display unit 9b, whereby the hold notice effect ends (see step S662B).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to irradiate the rear light guide plate 505b with the display LED 62b to emit and display the pattern of the rear light guide plate 505b (step S6012A). Specifically, the light from the display LED 62b is incident from the end face of the rear light guide plate 505b so that the light is reflected to the front side by the reflecting portion 511 of the rear light guide plate 505b, and a group of flowers appear. Perform the production. By executing the processing of step S6012A, the light guide plate effect using the rear light guide plate 505b is executed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display is changed and the hold notice effect is started. Then, control goes to a step S6016.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the reservation notice effect is performed in a mode with a light guide plate effect is shown, another prefetch notification effect is executed in a mode with a light guide plate effect instead of the reservation notice effect. It may be. For example, a continuous effect accompanied by a light guide plate effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect by continuously executing the light guide plate effect over a plurality of variable displays. In addition, the light guide plate effect may not be executed as an effect executed along with the pre-reading notice effect, but the light guide plate effect itself may be executed alone as the pre-reading notice effect.

  When it is determined not to execute the hold notice effect (N in step S6009), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hold memory number addition designation command to be processed is the first hold memory number addition designation command. Confirmation is made (step S6013). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 increases the first pending display by one in the first pending storage display unit 9a in a normal manner. (Step S6014). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a.

  When the pending storage number addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage number addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage number addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 performs normal operations in the first mode. The second hold display is increased by one in the 2 hold storage display unit 9b (step S6015). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the undetermined information in the current processing target command storage area in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the undetermined information to 0 (step S6016).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 and checks whether or not there is still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  Specifically, when a game ball starts and wins simultaneously at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable category command for the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, and A total of six commands including a command set of a first reserved memory number addition designation command and a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a command set of a second reserved memory number addition designation command for a start prize to the second start prize opening 14 May be transmitted within one timer interrupt. In this case, two sets of start prize commands are stored in the start prize command storage area within one timer interrupt. It is set to “1”. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 checks the undetermined information sequentially from the storage area of the start winning command storage area in ascending order of the area number, and the undetermined information is “1”. The command stored in the first storage area is used as the processing target, and the processing from step S6002 is executed. When the processing is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. Next, when returning to step S6001, since the undetermined information of the next storage area is also “1”, the undetermined information is stored in the second storage area of “1”. The process after step S6002 is executed with the command as a processing target, and when the process is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. In other words, when the game ball starts and wins at the same time in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, two sets of start winnings within one timer interruption in the hold notice effect processing (1) of step S800B. Processing for determining the presence / absence and mode of the hold notice effect for the time command is performed.

  In step S6017, the production control CPU 101 sets a hold notice setting restriction flag (step S6017), and starts a notice notice restriction period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the processing target pending memory count addition designation command is the first pending memory count addition designation command (step S6018). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 increases the first pending display by one in the first pending storage display unit 9a in a normal manner. (Step S6019). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a.

  When the pending storage number addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage number addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage number addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 performs normal operations in the first mode. The second hold display is increased by one in the 2 hold storage display unit 9b (step S6020). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b.

  Note that if the pending storage count addition designation command is missed or cannot be normally received, it is desirable to skip the processing of steps S6019 and S6020 so as not to increase the erroneous pending display. In addition, when the reserved storage number addition designation command is missed or cannot be normally received, the first hold display may be increased or the second hold display may be increased by default.

  In addition, even after the hold display is incremented by 1 in the normal manner in steps S6019 and S6020, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 and stores the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Check if the area still exists. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  In step S6021, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the processing target pending memory count addition designation command is the first pending memory count addition designation command (step S6021). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 increases the first pending display by one in the first pending storage display unit 9a in a normal manner. (Step S6022). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a.

  When the pending storage number addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage number addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage number addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 performs normal operations in the first mode. The second hold display is increased by one in the 2 hold storage display unit 9b (step S6023). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 increases the green round display by one as the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the determination postponement information in the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area to 1 (step S6024). In this case, based on the determination postponement information being set in step S6024, the determination is postponed in the on-hold notice effect processing (2) described later at the timing of suspending the hold memory (shifting the hold display). The determination of the hold notice effect with respect to the hold memory is performed, and the hold notice effect may be retroactively started.

  In addition, even after the determination postponement information is set in step 6026, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001, and is there still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area? Confirm whether or not. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect process (2) (steps S660C and S662C). In the hold notice effect process (2) (a process for determining and executing a hold notice effect at the timing of digesting the hold memory (shifting the hold display)), the effect control CPU 101 first sets the hold notice setting restriction flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S6501). If the hold notice setting restriction flag is not set (that is, not during the hold notice restriction period), the process proceeds to step S6506.

  If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set (that is, during the hold notice restriction period), the production control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command at the time of the start prize stored in the start prize command storage area. (Step S6502). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the commands for the start winning prize are stored are in a storage state in which all the commands for the start winning prize are received in order. (Step S6503).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as a command at the time of starting winning, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition designation) Command) will be received all at once within one timer interrupt, so if the commands are stored in all the storage areas 1-8 of the start winning command storage area, the MODE data will be stored. The commands “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) should be stored (see FIG. 23). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 still has a storage area in a storage state in which a command is lost due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data. , It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly.

  In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) should be received in this order. Therefore, if the command is stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, and “C0 (H)”. (Or “C1 (H)”). Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. In other words, it can be determined that there is still a storage area in a storage state in which the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If the storage area in the storage state in which it is determined that the received command at the start winning prize is not in the order or is partially missing, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process as it is. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state where all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the command storing area at the starting winning prize. In all the storage areas 1 to 8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent (step S6504). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Nevertheless, if the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 26) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a contradiction.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state where the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process as it is. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in the storage state in which the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 resets the pending notice setting restriction flag. (Step S6505). That is, in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area, since the command at the start winning prize is stored normally, the command that triggered the start of the pending notice restriction period is missed. It is determined that the on-hold storage in which the inconsistency has occurred is exhausted, the on-hold notice setting restriction flag is reset, and the on-hold notice restriction period ends.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 46 (step S6506). If there is no storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” (Y in step S6506), the process is terminated as it is.

  If there is a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” (N in step S6506), the effect control CPU 101 executes a command stored in the storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1”. It is set as a process target and it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined effect is being executed (step S6507). Whether or not the predetermined effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a predetermined effect executing flag when executing the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect process in step S800A, and executing the predetermined effect in step S6507. This can be determined by checking whether the flag is set. If the predetermined effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is.

  When the predetermined effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (see steps S658B and S662A) is zero. Is confirmed (step S6508). If the second reserved memory number is not 0 (that is, if there is a second reserved memory), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if there is no second reserved memory), the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (step S6509). Whether or not the second special symbol variation display is in progress can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (see step S628) is set. If the second special symbol variation display is in progress, the processing is terminated as it is.

  By executing the processing of steps S6507 to S6509, in this embodiment, even if it is the timing when the hold memory is digested (hold display is shifted) after the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, the predetermined effect is still executed. If it is in the middle, if there is a second reserved memory, or if the second special symbol is being variably displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is further postponed, and the hold notice effect is limited. In this embodiment, the hold notice effect process (2) is executed at the timing when the hold memory is exhausted (the hold display is shifted) at the start of the change display of the effect symbol. Since there is no case where the super-reach effect is being executed, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movable object notice effect or the super-reach effect is being executed and to perform the process of limiting the hold notice effect.

  If the variation display of the second special symbol is not in progress, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the variation category command to be processed at present (that is, the variation category command in which the determination postponement information stored in the start winning command storage area is set) ), A lottery process using a random number for determining the presence / absence of the holding notice effect and the appearance mode is performed, and the presence / absence of the holding notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step S6510). Note that the specific processing content of the determination process of the hold notice effect in step S6510 is the same as that in step S6008 of the hold notice effect process (1).

  When it is decided to execute the hold notice effect in any manner (Y in step S6511), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the processing target hold memory number addition designation command (that is, in the start winning command storage area). It is confirmed whether or not the stored storage number addition designation command in which the stored determination postponement information is set is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S6512). If the pending storage number addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 uses the first pending storage display unit 9a to display the first pending display corresponding to the processing target command. The display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the determined hold notice effect mode (step S6513). Specifically, in accordance with the determination result of step S6510, the production control CPU 101 changes the first hold display corresponding to the command to be processed from the green round display to the blue, in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Change to a red or rainbow-colored round display, and start the hold notice effect retrospectively. Then, control goes to a step S6514A.

  When the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage count addition designation command (that is, when it is the second pending storage count addition designation command), the presentation control CPU 101 In the second hold storage display unit 9b, the display mode of the second hold display corresponding to the command to be processed is changed from the normal display mode to the determined hold notice effect mode (step S6514). Specifically, in accordance with the determination result of step S6510, the production control CPU 101 changes the second hold display corresponding to the command to be processed from the green round display to the blue, in the second hold storage display unit 9b. Change to a red or rainbow-colored round display, and start the hold notice effect retrospectively. Then, control goes to a step S6514A.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to illuminate and display the pattern of the rear light guide plate 505b by irradiating the rear light guide plate 505b with the display LED 62b (step S6514A). Specifically, the light from the display LED 62b is incident from the end face of the rear light guide plate 505b so that the light is reflected to the front side by the reflecting portion 511 of the rear light guide plate 505b, and a group of flowers appear. An effect is executed (see FIGS. 61 (6), 62 (8), and 63 (8)). By performing the process of step S6514A, the light guide plate effect using the rear light guide plate 505b is executed at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display and starting the hold notice effect. Then, control goes to a step S6515.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the reservation notice effect is performed in a mode with a light guide plate effect is shown, another prefetch notification effect is executed in a mode with a light guide plate effect instead of the reservation notice effect. It may be. For example, a continuous effect accompanied by a light guide plate effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect by continuously executing the light guide plate effect over a plurality of variable displays.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the command (symbol designation command) in the storage area in which the command corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol to be started this time is stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area. , The variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command (the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command) are deleted, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted (step S6515). ). Specifically, when the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received at the start of variation of the effect symbol (when the hold notice effect (2) is executed in step S660C), the storage area of the start winning command storage area Of these, these commands in the first storage area for storing the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number addition designation command are deleted, and each of the storage areas in the subsequent start winning command storage area is deleted. Shift content. In addition, when the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received at the start of variation of the effect symbol (when the hold notice effect (2) is executed in step S662C), among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area, Delete these commands in the first storage area that stores the design designation command, variable category command, and second reserved memory number addition designation command, and shift the contents of each storage area in the subsequent start winning command storage area To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the hold notice effect (N of step S6511), the process proceeds to step S6516.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the determination postponement information in the storage area of the command to be processed in the start winning command storage area and sets the value of the determination postponement information to 0 (step S6516).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6506 and checks whether or not there is still a storage area in which the determination postponement information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processing after step S6507 is repeatedly executed until the processing is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas whose determination postponement information is “1”.

  In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is limited, the determination of the hold notice effect itself is delayed until the time when the hold memory is consumed (shift of hold display) (see step S6510). It may be configured to execute processing until the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the process of determining the mode at the time of winning, and to delay only the execution of the hold notice effect until digestion of the hold memory (hold display shift). .

  In addition, when it is configured to delay only the execution of the hold notice effect as described above, if a big hit occurs during the restriction of the hold notice effect, the presence or state of the already decided hold notice effect is determined. It is desirable to cancel the determination result and not to execute the hold notice effect.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 54, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2). In the case of a command, a display result 3 designation command, or a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, the ratio of determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number is increased, and in the case of “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. You may make it raise the ratio which determines the combination of the production | presentation symbol in which 3 symbols were equal in the same even number design.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect display device 9 to display a notice effect (a notice effect other than the hold notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect blade role, etc.) The notice effect setting process for determining whether to execute the object notice effect or setting the effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8003).

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 55 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. If it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8004.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, pseudo-stops, and temporary stop symbols in the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S8105, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86 when the movable object notice effect is executed, or the effect blade effect notice effect is produced. When performing the above, an effect of moving the effect blades 79a and 79b by driving the motor 87 is performed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86 even when the super reach effect is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect (step S8106). Note that whether or not it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect, the process proceeds to step S8108.

  If it is not the start timing of the movable object notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S8107). Whether or not it is the start timing of the super reach effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is not the start timing of the super reach production, the process proceeds to step S8111.

  When it is the start timing of the movable object notice effect or the start timing of the super reach effect (Y in step S8106 or Y in step S8107), the effect control CPU 101 performs the current first display in the first hold storage display unit 9a. The display state of one hold display and the current display state of the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are stored (step S8108). In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 stores the display states of the first hold display and the second hold display in a hold display state storage area provided in the RAM. Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a hold non-display flag indicating that the non-display control for making the hold display non-display is being executed (step S8109). Then, the production control CPU 101 erases all the first hold display in the first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display section 9b, and starts the non-display control with the hold display in the non-display state. (Step S8110).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect (step S8111). Note that whether or not it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect, the process proceeds to step S8113.

  If it is not the end timing of the movable object notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the end time of the super reach effect (step S8112). Note that whether or not it is the end timing of the super reach effect can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is not the end timing of the super reach production, the process proceeds to step S8115.

  When it is the end timing of the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect (Y in step S8111 or Y in step S8112), the effect control CPU 101 resets the pending non-display flag (step S8113). ). Then, the production control CPU 101 executes a hold display return process for returning the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b to the display state, and hides them. Control is terminated (step S8114).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the hold display return process (step S8114). In the hold display return process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 46 (step S7000). . If there is no undetermined information of “1” (that is, if no new start winning has occurred during the non-display control), the effect control CPU 101 stores the hold stored in step S8108 as it is. The first hold display on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display on the second hold storage display unit 9b are returned to the display state (step S7011).

  If there is one for which the undetermined information is “1” (that is, when a new start prize has been generated during the non-display control), the production control CPU 101 causes a new start prize to be generated. It is checked whether or not the processing has been completed for all received commands at the time of start winning (step S7001). If the processing is finished for all the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, the processing is finished.

  If there is an unprocessed command at the time of start winning, the effect control CPU 101 sets the command stored in the storage area for which the undetermined information is “1” as a processing target, and also sets a pending notice setting restriction flag. It is confirmed whether or not is set (step S7002). If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7006.

  If the hold notice setting limit flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the current command to be processed at the start winning prize, and determines whether all the commands at the start winning prize have been received in order. Confirmation is made (step S7003). In step S7003, the effect control CPU 101 can determine whether or not all the commands at the start winning prize have been received in order by executing the same process as step S6003 of the hold notice effect process (1). .

  When it is determined that the received start winning command is not in order or part of the command is missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S7005. When it is determined that all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the contents of the current design target symbol designating command and the variation category command match. (Step S7004). In step S7004, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing similar to that in step S6004 of the hold notice effect processing (1), so that the contents of the symbol designation command to be processed and the variable category command match. It can be determined whether or not. When determining that the contents of the symbol designating command and the variation category command match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S7006.

  When it is determined that the commands at the start winning prize are not received in order (N in step S7003), or when it is determined that the contents of the current design target symbol designation command and the variable category command do not match ( In step S7004 N), the effect control CPU 101 sets a hold notice setting restriction flag (step S7005).

  In step S7006, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command (step S7006). If the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is the first pending storage count addition designation command, the presentation control CPU 101 performs the first pending display in a normal manner based on the pending display display state stored in step S8108. Is increased by one, the first hold display on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display on the second hold storage display unit 9b are restored (step S7007).

  When the pending storage count addition designation command to be processed is not the first pending storage count addition designation command (that is, the second pending storage count addition designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stores the suspension stored in step S8108. Based on the display state of the display, the second hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b in a state where the second hold display is increased by one in a normal manner. Is restored (step S7008).

  However, when the processes of steps S7007 and S7008 are executed, if there are a plurality of storage areas where the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area, the undetermined information becomes “1”. The first hold display on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display on the second hold storage display unit 9b at the timing when steps S7007 and S7008 are executed for the storage area command to be processed last among the stored storage areas. To return. For example, if two new start winnings have occurred during the non-display control, when performing the processing of steps S7007 and S7008 for the first undecided command, the hold display stored in step S8108 Only when the stored content is updated to a state in which the display state is increased by one to the hold display, the hold display is further increased by one when performing the processing of steps S7007 and S7008 for the second undecided command. In the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and in the second hold storage display unit 9b (in a state where the hold display is increased by two from the display state of the hold display stored in step S8108). The second hold display is restored.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the undetermined information in the current processing target command storage area in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the undetermined information to 0 (step S7009).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the determination postponement information in the storage area of the current processing target command in the start winning command storage area to 1 (step S7010). In this case, based on the determination postponement information being set in step S7010, the deferred storage is deferred in the deferral notice effect processing (2) at the timing of degrading the deferred memory (shifting the deferred display). In some cases, the hold notice effect is determined, and the hold notice effect is retroactively started.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S7001 and confirms whether or not there is still a storage area where the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processing after step S7002 is repeatedly executed until the processing is completed for the commands stored in all the storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  In this embodiment, the description is omitted, but when a big hit occurs, the CPU 101 for effect control irradiates the front light guide plate 505a with the display LED 62a to emit and display the pattern of the front light guide plate 505a. Also controls. Specifically, the light from the display LED 62a is incident from the end face of the front light guide plate 505a, and the light is reflected to the front side by the reflecting portions 510a to 510c of the front light guide plate 505a, thereby making a character pattern of “big hit”. Is produced in such a manner as to display the light emission.

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 52, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set (step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S1903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the production control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (step S1907) and selects process data corresponding to the production during the round. (Step S1908). Then, the process timer is started (step S1909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round processing (step S805) (step S1910).

  It should be noted that, in addition to the process for displaying a big hit, a process for displaying a small hit is provided. In the case of a small hit, for example, a predetermined period (a big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be produced in the same manner as in the case of sudden big hit.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 101 does not execute the production based on reception of the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect that suggests a small hit or suddenly probable big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit every process time, and performs the effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts one effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S880). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S881). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the confirmation of reception of the ending command, for example, during the round process (see step S805).

  If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part). Then, various lamps as the production parts, the speaker 27 as the production parts, and the movable member 78 and the production blade accessories 79a and 79b as the production parts are controlled (step S883). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, when the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S886).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode when the hold notice effect is restricted will be described. 61-63 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in case a hold notice production is restricted. Among these, FIG. 61 shows a specific example of the effect mode in the case where the hold notice effect is limited because the movable object notice effect is being executed. FIG. 62 shows a specific example of the effect mode when the hold notice effect is limited because the super reach effect is being executed. FIG. 63 shows a specific example of the effect mode when the hold notice effect is limited because there is the second reserved memory or because the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed. In FIGS. 61 to 63, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 61, a specific example of an effect mode in the case where the pending notice effect is limited because the moving object notice effect is being executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the first reserved memory is digested from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (1). Suppose that the change display of the effect design has started. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 61 (1), one first hold display is deleted in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 61, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the movable object notice effect at the start of the change of the effect symbol.

  Next, at the start timing of the movable object notice effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the first hold display on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display on the second hold storage display unit 9b are all erased. Then, non-display control is started (see Y in step S8106, S8110). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), control for moving the movable member 78 is performed in the movable object notice effect (see step S8105).

  Here, when the movable object notice effect is executed and the non-display control is performed, a new start prize is generated at the first start prize opening 13, and a command for a new start prize is transmitted. Shall be. In this case, based on the fact that the movable object notice effect is executed and the non-display control is performed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, and the hold notice effect is limited (see step S6000).

  Next, at the end timing of the movable object notice effect (see Y in step S8110), as shown in FIG. 61 (4), one first hold display corresponding to the start winning newly generated during the non-display control is displayed. In the increased state (in this example, the first hold display is increased from 1 to 3 and the first hold display is 3), the first hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a. The display and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are restored (see step S7007).

  When the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 61 (5), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol ends.

  Next, from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, one first reserved memory is digested and the first special symbol variation display is started, and as shown in FIG. Start displaying. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), one first hold display is deleted in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. In addition, at the timing when one first hold memory is consumed and the first hold display is shifted, determination of the hold notice effect is performed for the first hold memory where the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed (see step S6510). . In this example, the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the first hold memory in which the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the determined mode of holding notice effect, and the holding notice effect is started retrospectively (see step S6513). In addition, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), when light from the display LED 62b is incident from the end face of the rear light guide plate 505b, the light is reflected to the front side by the reflecting portion 511 of the rear light guide plate 505b, and a group of An effect in which a flower appears is executed (see step S6514A).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a specific example of the effect mode in the case where the hold notice effect is limited because the super reach effect is being executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 62, the first reserved memory is digested from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 62 (1). Suppose that the change display of the effect design has started. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 62 (1), one first hold display is erased and two first hold displays are displayed in the first hold storage display unit 9a. In the example shown in FIG. 62, it is assumed that a variation pattern including super reach is specified in the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), the left effect symbol is first stopped and then the same symbol ("7" in this example) as the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol. As shown in FIG. 62 (3), normal reach occurs.

  Next, at the start timing of the super reach production, as shown in FIG. 62 (4), the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b are all erased. Then, the non-display control is started (see Y in step S8107, S8110). And a super reach production is performed. In this embodiment, in the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (5), the movable member 78 is also controlled to be moved (see step S8105).

  Here, when the super reach effect is executed and the non-display control is performed, a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is generated, and a command for the new start winning is transmitted. Shall. In this case, based on the fact that the super reach effect is executed and the non-display control is performed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, and the hold notice effect is limited (see step S6000).

  Next, when the end time of the super reach effect is reached (see Y in step S8111), as shown in FIG. 62 (6), the first hold display corresponding to the start winning newly generated during the non-display control is increased by one. In this state (in this example, the number of the first hold display is increased from one to two and the number of the first hold display is three), the first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Then, the second hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b is restored (see step S7007).

  When the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 62 (7), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol is ended.

  Next, from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, one first reserved memory is digested and the first special symbol variation display is started, and as shown in FIG. Start displaying. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 62 (8), one first hold display is deleted in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. In addition, at the timing when one first hold memory is consumed and the first hold display is shifted, determination of the hold notice effect is performed for the first hold memory where the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed (see step S6510). . In this example, the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage in which the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the determined mode of holding notice effect, and the holding notice effect is started retrospectively (see step S6513). Also, as shown in FIG. 62 (8), when light from the display LED 62b is incident from the end surface of the rear light guide plate 505b, the light is reflected to the front side by the reflecting portion 511 of the rear light guide plate 505b, and a group of An effect in which a flower appears is executed (see step S6514A).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a specific example of an effect mode in the case where the hold notice effect is limited because of the presence of the second reserved memory or the fact that the second special symbol is being displayed is described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 63, the first reserved memory is digested from the state where two first reserved memories are accumulated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 63 (1). Suppose that the change display of the effect design has started. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), one first hold display is deleted and one first hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display unit 9a.

  Next, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in the second start prize opening 14 and a command for a new start prize is transmitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), the second hold display is increased by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b, and one second hold display is displayed. In this example, it is decided not to execute the hold notice effect for the newly generated second hold memory, and one second hold display is displayed in the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 63 (2). Assume that it is in the displayed state.

  In addition, when a new second start winning has occurred while the pre-reading notice effect (holding notice effect) for the first hold memory has already been executed, the game is played with stocking the possibility of a big hit. Since it cannot be prevented from being executed, in this case, it is desirable that the hold display is in a non-display state (the hold display is erased, or the movable member is moved to a shielding state). By doing so, the fairness of the game can be ensured when the hold notice effect is executed in the gaming machine in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  Next, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in the first start prize opening 13 and a command for a new start prize is transmitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), the first hold display is increased by one in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and two first hold displays are displayed. In this case, based on the presence of the second hold memory, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed, and the hold notice effect is limited (see step S6006).

  When the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 63 (4), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol ends.

  Next, based on the fact that there is one second reserved memory, the second reserved memory is preferentially digested, and the change display of the second special symbol is started and, as shown in FIG. Start displaying. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 63 (5), one second hold display is erased in the second hold storage display unit 9b and there is no second hold display. In addition, the hold notice effect process (2) is executed at the timing when one second hold memory is consumed and the second hold display is shifted (see step S662C), but the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Based on the fact, the determination of the hold notice effect is further postponed, and the hold notice effect is limited (see step S6509).

  Next, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated in the first start prize opening 13 and a command for a new start prize is transmitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (6), the first hold display is increased by one in the first hold storage display section 9a and three first hold displays are displayed. In this case, based on the fact that the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is limited (see step S6007).

  When the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 63 (7), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated.

  Next, from the state where three first reserved memories are accumulated, one first reserved memory is digested and the first special symbol variation display is started, and as shown in FIG. Start displaying. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 63 (8), one first hold display is erased and two first hold displays are displayed in the first hold storage display unit 9a. In addition, at the timing when one first hold memory is consumed and the first hold display is shifted, determination of the hold notice effect is performed for the first hold memory where the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed (see step S6510). . In this example, it is decided not to execute the hold notice effect for the first first hold memory generated in FIG. 63 (3), and the second first hold memory generated in FIG. 63 (6). Is determined to execute the hold notice effect, and as shown in FIG. 63 (8), the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the second first hold memory in which the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed is shown. Then, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the determined mode of holding notice effect, and the holding notice effect is started retrospectively (see step S6513). Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (8), when light from the display LED 62b is incident from the end surface of the rear light guide plate 505b, the light is reflected to the front side by the reflecting portion 511 of the rear light guide plate 505b, and a group of An effect in which a flower appears is executed (see step S6514A).

  In this embodiment, a predetermined effect is executed in such a manner that the roulette is rotated in response to the normal symbol variation display in the predetermined effect execution area 9F. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect aspect of the predetermined effect.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (A), the change of the effect symbol is started from the state in which the effect (variable display) of the left middle right effect symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 64 (B)). ). At that time, display control (predictive effect) is performed such that the image 9A of the character A displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves.

  Next, a control (start effect) for displaying a notification image (for example, an image displaying a “roulette chance”) 9B that is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started is executed (FIG. 64 ( C)). Then, the notification effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect during the predetermined effect is an effect that the symbol fluctuates in the predetermined effect execution area 9F (an effect in which the roulette rotates) (see FIG. 64D). Thereafter, in the predetermined effect execution area 9F, an image 9C is displayed that suggests that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 64E). Next, a notification image 9D is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 64F). Thereafter, an image 9E that clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) is displayed (result notification effect) on the effect display device 9 (FIG. 64F). reference).

  In this embodiment, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is restricted even when a new start prize is generated when the predetermined effect is executed in the manner shown in FIG. (See step S6005).

  In the case where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is informed in a manner such as shown in FIG. 64 that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to enter a state in which a game ball is likely to enter, for example, before displaying the notification result “◯” in the prescribed effect. 64 (E) to (G) after performing an effect such that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a short time. After displaying the notification result “◯”, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a long time (in this example, as shown in FIG. 28, 5.8 seconds × 1 time or 1.8 seconds × 3 times). It may be. Further, for example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be opened for a long time after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a short time simultaneously with the display of the notification result “◯”. By doing so, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a short time immediately before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a long time, so that the player can clearly recognize the opening timing of the variable winning ball device 15. be able to.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, before the start condition is satisfied (in this example, at the time of starting winning), predetermined information (in this example, the random number for determining the big hit, the variable pattern type for determining) Whether or not the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol) is determined based on a random number). Based on the prefetch determination result, the hold notice effect is executed. In this case, when a new start prize is generated when a specific notice effect (in this example, a predetermined effect or a movable object notice effect) is executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the pre-reading is performed. Regardless of the determination result, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted for the start winning until the specific notice effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific notice effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a new start winning is generated when a specific reach effect (in this example, a super reach effect) of the reach effects is being executed during the variation display of the effect symbols. Regardless of the prefetch determination result, the execution of the hold notice effect is limited to the start winning until the specific reach effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific reach effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the pending notice effect is limited when a start prize is newly generated during the period in which the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect is executed in the period in which the effect symbol variation display is executed. (I.e., during the period in which the change display of the effect symbol is being executed, the hold notice effect can be executed for the period before and after the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect is executed) However, the period for limiting the hold notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted in all periods in which the change display of the effect symbol accompanying the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect is executed (the next notice is not performed even if the hold notice effect is not performed at all for the restricted hold memory). It may be configured such that the hold notice effect may be executed after the display of the change. In addition, for example, a suggestion effect that suggests a specific notice effect or a specific reach effect prior to a specific notice effect or a specific reach effect (for example, an effect that darkens the display screen to a black screen (blackout), or development to super reach) When the suggestion effect is executed, the hold notice effect may be limited.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed at a specific timing (in this example, when a start winning is generated), and the second hold memory is stored at the specific timing, Limit the execution of the hold notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state where the possibility of the specific game state (in this example, the big hit game state) is stocked, and to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary. That is, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, if the hold notice effect is executed for the first hold memory in a state where the second hold memory is stored, It will be recognized that there may be a big hit in the first reserved memory that is postponed execution. Then, with the stock of the first reserved memory that can be a big hit, it becomes possible to aim for a continuous big hit by executing the game by the variable display of the second special symbol, more than necessary gambling Can be expensive. Therefore, in this embodiment, the euphoria is prevented from becoming higher than necessary by limiting the hold notice effect in the state where the second hold memory is stored.

  In this embodiment, as a specific timing, when the determination and execution of the hold notice effect is performed at the timing when the start prize is generated (however, after the hold notice effect is limited, the hold memory is exhausted (the hold display is shifted). ), The specific timing is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of determining and executing the hold notice effect at the timing of the start winning prize, it is determined that the hold notice effect is determined and executed at a specific timing when the hold memory is exhausted (hold display shift). You may make it perform. In addition, for example, it may be determined and executed the hold notice effect as a specific timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the start winning.

  Also, in this embodiment, after the hold notice effect is limited, the determination is postponed at the timing when the hold memory is consumed (the hold display is shifted) and there is no second hold memory and the second special symbol is not being displayed. Although the case where the determination and execution of the hold notice effect is performed with respect to the first hold memory that has been performed is shown, the hold notice effect is shown because the second hold memory is stored or the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed. Then, it may be configured so that no hold notice effect is executed at all for the first hold memory.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the display for the hold notice effect different from the normal display mode (in this example, green round display) in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b. The hold notice effect is executed at a specific timing by displaying the hold display in a mode (in this example, blue, red, or rainbow-colored round display). In addition, on the basis of the fact that a predetermined non-display condition (in this example, execution of the moving object notice effect or the super reach effect) is established, the hold display is not displayed in the first hold memory display unit 9a or the second hold memory display unit 9b. Display that sets the hold display to the display state in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b based on the fact that the non-display control to set the display state is executed and the establishment of the predetermined non-display condition is canceled Execute control. Further, when the non-display control is being executed at a specific timing, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, and after the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the non-display control is terminated and the display control is executed. The hold display is displayed in the normal display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the hold notice effect is already executed when shifting from the non-display control to the display control, and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, the case where the hold notice effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display from the normal display form is shown, but the aspect of the hold notice effect is shown in this embodiment. It cannot be limited to things. For example, in the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b, the hold notice effect may be executed in such a manner that a character or the like is displayed on the hold display. In addition, for example, a specific sound effect is output from the speaker 27 in response to the start winning, or a fan or the like is rotated to operate a predetermined part (for example, an operation means (for example, an operation button or a control stick-shaped operation). The hold notice effect may be executed by generating wind from the vicinity of the means) or by vibrating the operating means provided in the gaming machine.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the non-display control is executed by erasing the hold display in the first hold memory display unit 9a and the second hold memory display unit 9b is shown, The present invention is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, even if non-display control is executed by moving a movable member provided in the gaming machine to hide the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b. Good.

  In this embodiment, the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) is set to the non-display state. However, it is not limited to the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen, but a hold storage display provided in an area other than the liquid crystal display screen (for example, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a or the second special symbol hold). Non-display control may be performed by hiding the storage indicator 18b) with a movable member such as a cover.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning effect is limited when the start winning is newly generated in the period in which the non-display control is being executed among the periods in which the effect symbol variation display is being executed (that is, , Of the period in which the display of variation of the production symbol is executed, the period before and after the non-display control is executed shows the case where the hold notice effect can be executed). The time limit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted in all periods in which the variable display of the effect symbol that makes it possible to control the non-display by the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect is executed (the hold notice effect is completely performed for the restricted hold memory). It may be configured so that the hold notice effect may be executed after the next change display). In addition, for example, when a suggestion effect (for example, a reach selection effect or a next notice effect for notifying that the movable object notice effect will be executed next time) is executed prior to the hide control. The hold notice effect may be limited from when the suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the movable member 78 is moved at a specific timing, the execution of the hold notice effect is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the movement of the movable member 78, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, when the start-up prize is limited when the start-up prize is newly generated during the period in which the movable member 78 is moved in the period during which the effect symbol variation display is being executed (that is, In the period during which the effect symbol variation display is being executed, the period before and after the movable member 78 is moved indicates the case where the hold notice effect can be executed). The time limit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted in all periods in which the change display of the effect symbol accompanying the movement of the movable member 78 is executed (the next change is not performed even if the hold notice effect is not performed at all for the restricted hold memory). It may be configured such that a hold notice effect is executed after display). Further, for example, a suggestion effect that suggests the movement of the movable member 78 prior to the movement of the movable member 78 (for example, a serif notice effect that suggests the movement of the movable member 78, or a super reach that accompanies the movement of the movable member 78). When the suggestion effect is executed, the hold notice effect may be limited.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, a predetermined restriction condition (in this example, when a predetermined effect is being executed, when a movable object notice effect is being executed, or when a super reach effect is being executed) at a specific timing , If there is a second reserved memory, or if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed), the execution of the hold notice effect is limited, and the execution timing is different from the specific timing. (In this example, the hold notice effect is executed when digesting the hold memory and shifting the hold display). Therefore, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect at the optimal timing to draw attention to the hold notice effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that a specific timing is reached at the timing when the start winning is generated, and when the hold notice effect is limited at this specific timing, the hold memory is stored as an execution timing different from the specific timing. In the case where the hold notice effect is executed at the timing when the hold indication is shifted and the hold indication is shifted, that is, after the hold notice effect is limited, the hold notice effect is executed at the execution timing after the specific timing. However, the pending notice effect may be executed at a timing before the specific timing, for example, as an execution timing different from the specific timing. For example, as already described, in the case where the hold notice effect is configured to be executed at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the start winning is generated, until the specific timing is reached. It is possible to know in advance whether or not a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. For this reason, when it is known in advance that a predetermined restriction condition is established, a hold notice effect may be executed before a specific timing.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is being executed, when the movable object notice effect is being executed, when the super reach effect is being executed, when there is the second reserved memory, the second special While the case where the predetermined restriction condition is established while the symbol is being displayed is shown, the case where the holding notice effect is restricted is shown, the predetermined restriction condition is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, it is assumed that the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied even in a state where the variable display is not executed (in some cases, the variable display is not executed even during execution of the predetermined effect) such as when various error notifications are executed. The hold notice effect may be limited.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second start winning opening 13 is in the first state (variable) where the game ball easily passes. It is possible to control to the second state (the closed state of the variable winning ball device 15) in which the game ball is difficult to pass (the open state of the winning ball device 15). Then, as the specific notice effect, a predetermined effect that notifies that the second start winning opening 14 is controlled to the first state is executed, and the pending notice effect is limited based on the execution of the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state where it is recognized that there is a possibility that the first reserved memory may be in the specific game state, and the gambling ability becomes higher than necessary. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the movable object notice effect which moves the movable member 78 is performed as a specific notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention with respect to the movement of the movable member 78 from decreasing, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the case where the hold notice effect is limited when the predetermined effect or the movable object notice effect is executed as the specific notice effect is shown. However, the specific notice effect is shown in this embodiment. It cannot be limited to things. For example, as a specific notice effect, when a re-lottery effect is being executed during the change display of the effect symbol, or when an intense heat notice effect (for example, a group notice effect or a background notice effect) is being executed, (For example, whether or not the pseudo-continuation continues, whether or not to develop into a super reach, or whether or not to develop into a chance) May be.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the super reach production accompanying the movement of the movable member 78 is executed as the specific reach production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention with respect to the movement of the movable member 78 from decreasing, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the occurrence of the start winning, the prefetch determination is performed as to whether or not the display result of the variation display of the effect symbol is the specific display result, and the prefetch determination is performed. Sometimes when a specific notice effect or a specific reach effect is executed, when a second reserved memory is stored, when a non-display control is executed, or when the movable member 78 is moved, After the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect ends, or after the second hold memory is not stored, the non-display control is ended, and the movable member 78 is moved, the specific condition ( In this example, the hold notice effect is executed based on the fact that the hold memory is used and the hold display is shifted). Therefore, by delaying the execution timing of the hold notice effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific notice effect and the specific reach effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, after the hold notice effect is limited, as a specific condition, the hold notice for the hold memory whose determination has been postponed is based on the timing to digest the hold memory and shift the hold display. Although the case where the determination and execution of the effect is performed is shown, the specific condition is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, based on the fact that the second reserved memory is lost, the symbol determination designation command is received and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined, the variation pattern command is received and the next variation display is started, Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied, the hold notice effect may be determined and executed for the hold memory whose determination is postponed. Further, for example, it may be configured to immediately determine and execute the hold notice effect at the timing when the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect is finished. After the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect is finished, a predetermined time (for example, It may be configured to determine and execute the hold notice effect at the timing when 10 seconds) elapses.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed when the number of first hold memories decreases. Therefore, the timing at which the hold notice effect is executed can be grasped, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the non-display control is executed assuming that the predetermined non-display condition is satisfied when the specific reach effect (in this example, the super reach effect) of the reach effects is being executed. Therefore, attention can be paid to the specific reach production, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the non-display control is executed assuming that the predetermined non-display condition is satisfied when the movable object notice effect for moving the movable member 78 is being executed. Therefore, attention can be paid to the movable object notice effect that moves the movable member 78, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the non-display control is executed on the assumption that the predetermined non-display condition is established based on the execution of the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect is shown. The non-display conditions are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, the non-display control may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined non-display condition is satisfied based on the execution of the predetermined effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the movable member 78 is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device 9 (image display device) included in the gaming machine, and the movable member 78 is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device). Move in an overlapping manner. Therefore, attention can be paid to the movable member 78 movable in a manner overlapping with the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device), and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device 9 (image display device), and the movable member 78 moves to move the movable member on the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device). Although the case where 78 overlaps (it makes it hard to see by covering a display screen) is shown, it is not restricted to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, the movable member is provided at a location different from the effect display device 9 (image display device), and even if the movable member is movable, the movable member does not overlap the front surface of the effect display device 9 (image display device). It may be one that does not affect the visual state of the display screen. For example, the movable member may be provided on the game frame side.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the movable member 78 is moved, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted on the assumption that the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Therefore, avoiding the time when the movable member 78 is moved, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect at an optimal timing, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is limited based on the fact that the predetermined effect is being executed, assuming that the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the time when the predetermined effect is being executed and to execute the hold notice effect at an optimal timing, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect may be limited by prohibiting the execution of the hold notice effect. In this case, for example, the hold notice effect (2) (see steps S660C and S662C) that is executed when the hold memory is consumed (hold display shift) is not provided, and the hold notice effect is not retroactively executed. What is necessary is just to comprise. With such a configuration, by completely prohibiting the execution of the pending notice effect, while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific notice effect and the specific reach effect, while preventing gambling from becoming higher than necessary, and While maintaining the degree of attention to the movement of the movable member, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the hold notice effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made, the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the start winning occurs, and the first reserved memory or Reserving storage information (in this example, holding memory number addition designation command (first holding memory number addition designation command or second pending memory number addition designation command) is transmitted so as to recognize that the second holding memory has increased. Determination result information (in this example, a symbol designating command and a variation category command) indicating whether or not it is a small hit or not, a determination result of a big hit type and a variation pattern type is transmitted. If at least one of the hold storage information and the judgment result information cannot be normally received, execution of the hold notice effect is restricted. To. Therefore, it can be prevented that accidentally not based on the determination result of the pre-read determination result in run held informational display, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reliability of the pending announcement attraction.

  In this embodiment, the case where the hold notice effect is executed as the predetermined notice effect based on the pre-reading determination result is shown. For example, a continuous notice effect other than the hold notice effect (“change in variation pattern when the symbol fluctuates”). Or “continuous notice effect in the mode transition” or “countdown” mode may be configured to be executable. And, when such a continuous notice effect is configured to be executable, according to the same processing as this embodiment, either the stored storage information or the determination result information cannot be normally received In addition, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be limited.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the determination result information (in this example, the symbol designating command and the variable category command) transmitted based on one hold storage cannot be normally received, The execution of the hold notice effect is limited until the variable display based on the hold memory is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hold notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the hold notice effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, there is a case in which execution of the hold notice effect is restricted from when a command is missed or inconsistent until the reserved memory where the command is missed or inconsistent is exhausted. As shown, the execution of the hold notice effect is limited only to the hold memory where the command is missed or inconsistent, and the command at the start winning prize is normally set for the hold memory generated after that. If it is received, the execution of the hold notice effect may not be restricted even before the hold memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent has been consumed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, a process for confirming the hold notice setting limit flag in step S6002 of the hold notice effect process (1), a process for checking the hold notice setting restriction flag in step S7002 of the hold display return process, The processing of steps S6501 to S6505 of the notice effect processing (2) is not necessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the determination of the hold notice effect is not performed when a command is missed or inconsistency occurs, but the determination of the hold notice effect itself is performed. The execution may be restricted. For example, in the case of the hold notice effect process (1), if a command miss or mismatch is detected in the determination process of steps S6003 to S6004, the process of step S6017 is executed to set the hold notice setting restriction flag, while step S6003. Regardless of the determination result of S6004 and the presence / absence of the hold notice setting restriction flag, the determination process of the hold notice effect in step S6008 may be executed without fail. If the hold notice setting restriction flag is set, the hold notice display may be displayed in a normal manner regardless of the determination result of S6008 so as not to execute the hold notice effect.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes, as the determination result information, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, a symbol designation command that can specify the determination result of the big hit type, and a predetermined value. A variable category command that can specify whether or not a state (in this example, super reach) is set is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 also restricts the execution of the pending notice effect even when the determination result specified by the received symbol designation command is inconsistent with the determination result specified by the received variation category command. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the hold notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the hold notice effect from being lowered.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 restricts execution of the hold notice effect even when the hold storage information and the determination result information cannot be received in the regular order. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the hold notice effect from being lowered.

  Also, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the probability change state (high probability state) is always controlled after the big hit game is finished, and a predetermined number of times (71 times in this example) after the big hit game ends. Although the case where it is applied to a gaming machine that ends the probability variation state (high probability state) based on the termination of the display is shown, the gaming machine to which the configuration shown in this embodiment can be applied is such a game. I can't stop at the machine. For example, this embodiment shows a game machine provided with a normal big hit that is controlled only in a high base state (short-time state) in addition to a probability big hit that is controlled to a promiscuous state after the big hit game ends as a big hit type. A configuration for setting and executing the hold notice effect or a configuration for restricting setting and execution of the hold notice effect may be applied. In this case, for example, when a probable big hit is made, the probable state may be controlled until the next big hit occurs while controlling to the probable state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when the big hit is normal, the high base state (time reduction state) is controlled after the big hit game is finished, and the high base state is reached at the timing when the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the fluctuation display is finished after the big hit game is finished. (Time-short state) may be terminated. Further, in such a game machine, when it is configured to suddenly provide a probable big hit or small win, it is in a high base state in order to make it difficult to recognize whether or not it is controlled to a probable change state (high probability state). In some cases, when sudden odd-decision jackpots are suddenly reached, a high probability state is controlled and a high base state is maintained after the big hit game based on sudden odd-variable jackpots. In some cases, it is desirable to control only to the high probability state after the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit and not to control to the high base state (maintain the low base state).

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the pre-reading determination process (see steps S1217A and S1217B) itself is executed when a new start prize is generated. If it is being executed, if a super reach effect is being executed, if there is a second reserved memory, or if a variation of the second special symbol is being displayed, the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is displayed. Although the case where it restrict | limits was shown, you may comprise so that the process of the prefetch determination itself may be postponed and a reservation notice effect may be restrict | limited. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which the prefetch determination process itself is postponed to limit the hold notice effect will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a start port switch passage process in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (A), in this embodiment, in the first start port switch passage processing, the winning effect processing in step S1217A shown in the first embodiment is not performed, and the game control microcomputer. The prefetch determination process is not performed on the 560 side. In this embodiment, instead of the symbol designating command and the variation category command shown in the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the random R (random hit determination random number) extracted in step S1214A. Control for transmitting the set jackpot determination random number command (step S1218a) and control for transmitting the variation pattern type determination random number command in which the value of the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in step S1214A is set Is performed (step S1219a). Note that the processes in steps S1211A to S1216A and S1220A are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), in this embodiment, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S1217B shown in the first embodiment is not performed, and the game control The prefetch determination process is not performed on the microcomputer 560 side. Further, in this embodiment, instead of the symbol designation command and the variation category command shown in the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the random R (big hit determination random number) extracted in step S1214B. Control for transmitting the set jackpot determination random number command (step S1218b) and control for transmitting the variation pattern type determination random number command in which the value of the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in step S1214B is set Is performed (step S1219b). Note that the processes in steps S1211B to S1214B and S1220B are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect process (1) (step S800B) in the second embodiment. In the hold notice effect process (1), the processes in steps S6000 to S6002 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, if the pending notice setting restriction flag is not set in step S6002, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the command for the current start winning prize to be processed, and receives all the commands for the starting winning prize in order. It is confirmed whether or not it has been done (step S6003a). Note that the basic determination method in step S6003a is the same as that in step S6003 shown in the first embodiment, but in step S6003a, the presentation control CPU 101 designates the symbols shown in the first embodiment. Instead of a command and a variation category command, a jackpot determination random number command, a variation pattern type determination random number command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition designation command) It is determined whether or not all three commands are received in order.

  In this embodiment, since the symbol designation command and the variable category command are not transmitted / received, the determination processing in step S6004 shown in the first embodiment is not performed.

  Next, the processes in steps S6005 to S6007 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  Next, if the variation of the second special symbol is not being displayed (N in step S6007), the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the big hit determination random number specified by the big hit determination random number command and the random number command for variation pattern type determination. Based on the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type, the effect process at the time of winning is executed, and the prefetch determination process is performed (step S6008a). Note that the basic processing content of the winning effect processing in step S6008a is the same as the processing in steps S1217A and S1217B described in the first embodiment.

  Then, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the determination result of step S6008a (specifically, the determination result as to whether or not the variation category is non-reach, super-reach, or super reach big hit). The lottery process using the random number for determining the presence / absence of execution and the production mode is performed to determine the execution / non-execution of the hold notice effect and the production mode (step S6008b).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, even when a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize by executing the process of step S6000, the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect are being executed. When the non-display control is being performed, the pre-reading determination process itself is postponed so that the holding notice effect is not started immediately, and the holding notice effect is limited.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S6005 to S6007, even if a new start prize is generated and a command is received at the start prize, a predetermined effect is being executed, 2 If there is a hold memory, or if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the pre-read determination process itself is postponed so that the hold notice effect is not started immediately, and the hold notice effect is limited.

  Note that the processing after step S6009 is the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect process (2) (steps S660C and S662C) in the second embodiment. In the hold notice effect process (2), the processes in steps S6501 to S6502 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the commands for the start winning prize are stored are in a storage state in which all the commands for the start winning prize are received in order. (Step S6503a). Note that the basic determination method in step S6503a is the same as that in step S6503 shown in the first embodiment, but in step S6503a, the effect control CPU 101 designates the symbol shown in the first embodiment. In place of the command and the variation category command, the jackpot determination random number command, the variation pattern type determination random number command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved number) in all the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area It is determined whether or not all three commands (stored number addition designation command or second reserved storage number addition designation command) have been received in order.

  In this embodiment, since the symbol designation command and the variable category command are not transmitted / received, the determination processing in step S6504 shown in the first embodiment is not performed.

  Next, the processes in steps S6505 to S6509 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  Next, if the variation of the second special symbol is not being displayed (N in step S6509), the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the big hit determination random number specified by the big hit determination random number command and the random number command for variation pattern type determination. Based on the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type that is specified, the effect process at the time of winning is executed, and the process of prefetch determination is performed (step S6510a). Note that the basic processing content of the winning effect processing in step S6510a is the same as the processing in steps S1217A and S1217B described in the first embodiment.

  Then, based on the determination result of step S6510a (specifically, the determination result of whether or not the variable category is non-reach, super-reach, and super reach big hit), the effect control CPU 101 The lottery process using the random number for determining the presence / absence of execution and the production mode is performed to determine the execution / non-execution of the hold notice effect and the production mode (step S6510b).

  Note that the processes after step S6511 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, based on the occurrence of the start winning, it is determined whether or not the notice effect or the reach effect is executed, and the specific notice effect (in this example, the predetermined notice effect) If it is determined that the production, the moving object notice production) or the specific reach production (in this example, the super reach production) is executed, or if the second reserved memory is stored, the non-display control is executed. In the case where the movable member 78 is moved, the non-display control is ended after the specific notice effect or the specific reach effect is ended or after the second reserved memory is not stored. Then, based on the fact that the specific condition (in this example, digesting the hold memory and shifting the hold display) is established when the movable member 78 has finished moving, the display result of the effect symbol variation display is the specific display result. Whether or not To execute the judgment read. Therefore, by delaying the determination timing of the prefetch determination, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the execution frequency of the pending notice effect while maintaining the degree of attention to the specific notice effect and the specific reach effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment, the movable member 78 movable in a manner overlapping with the front of the display screen of the effect display device 9 from the outside of the effect display device 9 (image display device) in the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect. Although the movable case is shown, the movable member that can be moved in the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect is not limited to this, and even if it is movable, it does not overlap the front of the display screen of the effect display device 9. May be. For example, the movable member provided on the game frame side of the gaming machine may be moved in the movable object notice effect or the super reach effect. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which the movable member provided on the game frame side of the gaming machine is moved in the movable object notice effect and the super reach effect will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 68 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment as seen from the front. FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing a state in which the glass door frame is opened in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in this embodiment, rotary movable LED units 200L and 200R are provided on the upper and left sides of the game frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, the movable LED units 200L and 200R can change from the first state to the second state by moving in a rotating manner.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a movable mode of the movable LED units 200L and 200R. Among these, FIG. 70 (A) shows an AA cross-sectional view in the first state of the movable LED units 200L and 200R when viewed along the AA plane in FIG. FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in the second state of the movable LED units 200L and 200R when viewed along the plane AA in FIG. FIG. 70C shows a perspective view of the movable LED units 200L and 200R as viewed obliquely from above, and FIG. 70D shows a front view of the movable LED units 200L and 200R as seen from the front. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the movable LED units 200L and 200R are provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass door frame 102 so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 201 that faces in the left-right direction. A circular first light emitting surface 202A formed by notching parallel to the rotating shaft 201 in the vicinity of the rotating shaft 201 passing through the center, and the opposite of the first light emitting surface 202A with the rotating shaft 201 as a reference. And a circular second light emitting surface 202B formed by cutting out in a direction intersecting the rotating shaft 201 on the side.

  More specifically, the second light emitting surface 202B has a smaller area than the first light emitting surface 202A, and is formed to face slightly inward when the first light emitting surface 202A faces the back. 202 A of 1st light emission surfaces are comprised with the flat lens member (illustration omitted) which has translucency, diffuses the light of several 1st LED203a provided in the inside of a main body, and radiate | emits it outward. Yes. On the other hand, the second light emitting surface 202B is made of a non-light-transmitting plate and has a plurality (five in this embodiment) of through holes 204, and each of the through holes 204 has a plurality of second holes provided inside the main body. Two LEDs 203b are arranged so as to face each other and function as a spotlight.

  The movable LED units 200 </ b> L and 200 </ b> R configured in a hemispherical shape as described above can rotate around the rotation shaft 201 in the hemispherical concave portions 102 b formed on the upper and left sides of the front surface 102 a of the glass door frame 102. Is housed in. One of the rotation shafts 201 protruding to the left and right is connected to the LED motor 205, and the LED motor 205 rotates the rotation shaft 201 around the axis so that a flat first light emitting surface is obtained. The state can be changed (rotated) between a first state where 202A faces the front side (see FIG. 70A) and a second state where the second light emitting surface 202B faces the front side (see FIG. 70B). ing.

  In the first state, the main body portions of the movable LED units 200L and 200R are accommodated in the recess 102b, and the first light emitting surface 202A faces the front and the second light emitting surface 202B faces the front surface 102b. Are disposed so as to be substantially flush with the front surface 102a. That is, therefore, the main body portions of the movable LED units 200L and 200R do not protrude from the front surface 102a.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the main body portions of the movable LED units 200L and 200R deviate from the recess 102b, and the second light emitting surface 202B faces the front and the first light emitting surface 202A faces the rear, whereby the second light emitting surface 202B. The front end portion of the spherical surface having a protrusion is provided so as to protrude L1 by a predetermined protrusion length with respect to the front surface 102a.

  Further, in the second state, the second light emitting surfaces 202B of the left and right movable LED units 200L and 200R face inward slightly below, respectively, so that the upper plate 3 positioned at the lower center of the left and right movable LED units 200L and 200R. The area around the push button 250 on the upper surface 3a can be locally illuminated or reciprocated up and down.

  In this embodiment, when a movable object notice effect or a super reach notice effect is executed, the left and right movable LED units 200L and 200R are rotated in place of the movable member 78 shown in the first embodiment. Then, control is performed to change from the first state shown in FIG. 70 (A) to the second state shown in FIG. 1 (B).

  In this embodiment, the push button 250 provided on the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is also configured to be movable, and functions as a kind of movable member. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a movable aspect of the push button 250. 71A shows the initial position of the push button 250, FIG. 71B shows the first position of the push button 120, and FIG. 71C shows the push button 250. The 2nd position is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the push button 250 is configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player, and in the main body of the upper plate 3 at the position where the push button 250 is installed. A button switch (not shown) for detecting the player's operation action performed on the push button 250 is provided.

  Further, the push button 250 is provided such that the operation surface 250b that is the top surface protrudes a predetermined height from the upper surface 3a that is the installation surface of the push button 250.

  Although not particularly shown, the push button 250 is composed of a base body provided inside the main body of the upper plate 3 and a bottomed cylindrical mobile body provided so as to be movable up and down with respect to the base body. When the operation surface 250b formed on the moving body is pressed, the operation is detected by the button switch 250a. That is, the operation surface 250b is movable between an initial position where the operation surface 250b slightly protrudes from the upper surface 3a (see FIG. 71A) and the operation surface 250b is pressed below the initial position (not shown). It is provided and is always maintained at the initial position by a biasing force of a spring (not shown).

  The push button 250 is configured such that the moving body is moved up and down by a button motor and a driving force transmission mechanism (not shown) (not shown). Specifically, an initial position where the operation surface 250b slightly protrudes from the upper surface 3a (see FIG. 71A) and a second position where the operation surface 250b greatly protrudes from the upper surface 3a (see FIG. 71C). ) And can be moved up and down. In addition, an elevating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary position from the initial position to the second position, and a mechanism capable of detecting a pressing operation at the pressing position (not shown) by a button switch is provided.

  Further, in this example, while moving from the initial position to the second position, the first position (see FIG. 71B), which is a substantially intermediate position between the initial position and the second position, is passed. For example, the content of the effect may be different depending on whether the push button 250 is operated at the initial position, the first position, or the second position.

  Note that the first position and the second position are different from the pressing position positioned below the initial position, and are movable positions positioned in the direction (upward) opposite to the pressing operation direction (downward) with respect to the initial position. In addition, it is an operation position where a pressing operation is possible in the same manner as the initial position. That is, the initial position is the initial operation position, the first position is the first operation position, and the second position is the second operation position.

  The protrusion height of the operation surface 250a of the push button 250 with respect to the upper surface 3a of the upper plate 3 is higher at the protrusion height L10 at the first position than at the initial position, and at the second position than at the first position. L11 is higher (L10 <L11). The first position is set at a substantially intermediate position between the initial position and the second position, but may be closer to the initial position or closer to the second position.

  Then, when the movable object notice effect or the super reach notice effect is executed, the push button 120 is moved, for example, when the push button 250 is in the initial position, the first position, or the second position. The contents of the production may differ depending on whether or not it is done.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in this example, the movable LED units 200L and 200R, the push button 120) is provided in the gaming frame of the gaming machine. Therefore, attention can be paid to the movable member provided in the game frame of the gaming machine, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the movable member provided with the display part which displays the content (for example, provision of a bonus) of the game value provided to a player as a movable member provided in a game frame may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the content of the game value displayed on the movable member, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the first embodiment, when the start notice effect is limited when a new start winning occurs, the predetermined effect is still being executed even at the timing when the hold memory is consumed (the hold display is shifted), In the case where there is a second reserved memory, when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the case where the hold notice effect is further limited has been shown. Even if the production is being executed, if there is the second reserved memory, or if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, if the number of times of the pending notice production reaches the upper limit, the pending notice You may make it perform determination and execution of an effect. In the following, a fourth embodiment in which an upper limit is set for the number of times of holding notice effect will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect process (1) (step S800B) in the fourth embodiment. In the hold notice effect process (1), the processes in steps S6000 to S6026 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the determination postponement information is set in step S6024, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the determination postponement count counter for counting the number of times that the determination of the hold notice effect is postponed and the hold notice effect is limited ( Step S6024A).

  FIGS. 73 and 74 are flowcharts showing the hold notice effect process (2) (steps S660C and S662C) in the fourth embodiment. In the hold notice effect process (2), the processes in steps S6501 to S6509 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the predetermined effect is being executed (Y at step S6507), when the second reserved memory number is not 0 (N at step S6508), or when the second special symbol is being changed (Y at step S6509). ), The effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the determination postponement number counter (step S6509A). Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the determination postponement number counter after the addition is 3 or more (step S6509B). If the value of the judgment postponement counter after the addition is not 3 or more, the process is terminated as it is. Also, if the value of the determination postponement counter after the addition is 3 or more, the process proceeds to step S6510, and if the predetermined effect is still being executed or if there is a second reserved memory, the second special symbol Even in the case of the variable display, the process proceeds to a process for determining and executing the hold notice effect.

  Note that the processes in steps S6510 to S6516 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  Next, when the determination postponement information is cleared in step S6516, the effect control CPU 101 clears the value of the determination postponement number counter (step S6516A).

  In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 provides a determination postponement number counter separately for each hold display, and counts up the determination postponement number counter separately for each hold display, thereby limiting the number of times of the hold notice effect. It is desirable to manage.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established at a specific timing and execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the predetermined condition is established at an execution timing different from the specific timing. In such a case, even if the execution of the hold notice effect is further restricted, and the predetermined condition is established at a specific timing and the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the number of times that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the predetermined number of times (in this example, 3 times), the hold notice effect is executed regardless of the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the hold memory is consumed without executing the hold notice effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the holding notice effect is executed by performing light emission control using the rear light guide plate 505b. Therefore, the production effect of the reservation notice effect can be enhanced by incorporating the production using the light guide plate.

  In addition, the production aspect of the reservation notice effect using the light guide plate is not limited to that shown in each of the above embodiments. For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the hold notice effect is performed using only the rear light guide plate 505b has been described. However, the reflection part of the hold notice effect is also formed on the front light guide plate 505a. You may comprise so that a reservation notice effect may be performed using both of the light-guide plates 505b. In this case, for example, two types of effects, that is, an effect using the front light guide plate 505a and an effect using the rear light guide plate 505b may be executed as the hold notice effect. Further, in this case, for example, a notice effect using both the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b may be executed. For example, the effect of controlling the light emission alternately between the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b may be executed, or the effect of controlling the light emission of the front light guide plate 505a and the rear light guide plate 505b simultaneously. Good.

  Moreover, even if it is a case where a holding notice effect is performed using only one light guide plate, a plurality of kinds of holding notice effects may be executed. In this case, for example, a plurality of display LEDs (for example, LEDs for upper-stage irradiation, LEDs for middle-stage irradiation, and LEDs for lower-stage irradiation) are provided on one light guide plate, and display LEDs are irradiated. May be configured such that a plurality of types of holding notice effects can be executed by reflecting light at the reflecting portions of different parts of the light guide plate.

  Further, when a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects (in this example, a hold notice effect) are configured to be executable as described above, for example, when a prefetch notice effect with the first reserved memory as a notice object is executed, You may comprise so that the light-guide plate effect of a different aspect may be performed with the prefetch notice effect which makes 2 reservation memory | storage a notice object. In this case, for example, when the second reserved memory is accumulated, the light guide plate effect of the effect mode corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect with the first reserved memory as the notice object may be restricted so as not to be executed. Further, for example, when the gaming state is controlled to the high base state, the light guide plate effect of the effect mode corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect with the first reserved memory as a notice object is not executed or vice versa. In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the low base state, the light guide plate effect in the effect mode corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect with the second reserved memory as a notice object may be restricted. .

  In addition, when a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects (in this example, a hold notice effect) are configured to be executable as described above, the hold display mode (for example, the color, shape, and size of the hold display) You may comprise so that the expectation degree with respect to the reserved memory may differ depending on the combination with the mode of the light plate effect (for example, the light emission color and the size of the light emission location).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the light guide plate effect is executed by performing the light emission control using the rear light guide plate 505b at the time of executing the holding notice effect is shown. A continuous effect accompanied by a light guide plate effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect by continuously executing the light guide plate effect over a plurality of variable displays.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the light guide plate effect is executed in the hold notice effect is shown, but the light guide plate effect is executed as a single effect, not only in the case of executing in the hold notice effect. Alternatively, it may be executed as a notice effect other than the hold notice effect or other effects.

  Further, for example, even when the light guide plate effect is executed as the continuous effect of the pre-reading notice effect as described above, the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments is applied, and the second reserved memory is stored. If so, the execution of the light guide plate effect may be limited. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being executed in a state where the possibility of a specific gaming state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) is stocked, and to prevent gambling from becoming higher than necessary. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the light guide plate is fixedly provided at a position overlapping the display screen of the effect display device 9. However, the light guide plate is rotated in front of the effect display device 9. Or may be configured to be movable such as moving up and down. When the light guide plate is configured to be movable, for example, the light guide plate is movable like a shutter, and the light guide plate is moved to a predetermined retracted position (a position that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 9. However, even if it partially overlaps). May be operated to a predetermined movable position (position overlapping the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 9) to control light emission.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, no particular mention has been made of the light emission colors of the display LEDs 62a and 62b that allow light to enter the light guide plate, but display of a plurality of types of light emission colors (for example, blue, green, and red). LED may be used. In this case, for example, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be changed depending on the light emission color when the light emission control of the light guide plate is performed (for example, in the case of the red light emission color, the expectation is the highest, and the green light emission color Next, the expectation is the highest, and the expectation is the lowest in the case of the blue emission color). Further, for example, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be suggested by a combination of the emission color and a pattern that appears on the light guide plate by the emission control.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the light guide plate effect is executed, the picture displayed on the light guide plate and the liquid crystal image of the effect display device 9 that can be seen through the light guide plate overlap to appear as one image. Various effects may be executed. When a plurality of light guide plates are provided as in this example (front light guide plate 505a and rear light guide plate 505b), the pattern displayed on the front light guide plate 505a and the pattern displayed on the rear light guide plate 505b overlap. (Moreover, the liquid crystal images may overlap.) An effect that looks like one image may be executed.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the variation control pattern 100 indicating the variation pattern such as the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. to the production control microcomputer 100. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function based on a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function based on a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In addition, the configuration for executing the continuous notice effect and the hold notice effect as the predetermined notice effect shown in each of the above embodiments can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to various forms of gaming machines. For example, the configuration for executing the continuous notice effect and the hold notice effect shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a sealed circulation pachinko machine. In the enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine are enclosed in an enclosed area (for example, in a pachinko machine), and the game area provided in the pachinko machine In order to fire game balls through the game area, collect the game balls via the collection unit (for example, each winning opening, out port, foul ball return opening), and fire the collected game balls again into the game area In the enclosed area. In addition, in such a sealed circulation pachinko machine, when there is a prize at each prize opening, points corresponding to the number of prize balls are added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the prize balls. Processing is performed. In such an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is applied, and when a presentation symbol variation display is performed on the production display device of the enclosed circulation pachinko machine, a holding notice effect is executed. When the predetermined effect is being executed, or when the movable object notice effect is being executed, the super reach effect is being executed. In this case, when there is the second reserved memory, or when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the hold notice effect may not be started immediately, and the hold notice effect may be limited.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, each of a plurality of gaming media can pass through a first starting area and a second starting area at the same time. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through at least one of the first start area and the second start area, a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, the display result is derived and displayed, and the display result is determined in advance. The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the displayed specific display result is derived and displayed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Effect display device 9a 1st reserved memory display part 9b 2nd reserved memory display part 9F Predetermined effect execution area 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd Starting prize opening 20 Special variable winning ball equipment 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 62a LED for display
62b LED for display
78 Movable member 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
505a Front light guide plate 505b Rear light guide plate

Claims (1)

Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the game medium passes through the first start area, the game medium starts the first variable display means or the second start area for starting the variable display of the first identification information and deriving and displaying the display result. The display result derived and displayed in the second variable display means for starting the variable display of the second identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after passing, The game machine is controlled to be in a specific gaming state, and the variable display of the second identification information is executed in preference to the variable display of the first identification information,
A light-transmitting light guide plate capable of transmitting light;
A light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate;
For variable display of the first identification information for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the first start area, predetermined information is stored as reserved storage up to the first upper limit number. 1 hold storage means;
For the variable display of the second identification information for which the start condition has not yet been established even though the game medium has passed through the second start area, the predetermined information is stored as a reserved storage up to the second upper limit number. A second reserved storage means;
Pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific display result based on the predetermined information before the start condition is satisfied;
Based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means, a predetermined notice for executing a predetermined notice effect in a variable display started before a variable display of the first identification information subject to the determination is executed at a specific timing Production execution means,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notice effect execution means includes:
In the case where the hold storage is stored in the second hold storage means at the specific timing, the execution of the predetermined notice effect is limited,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the predetermined notice effect, a light emitting effect is executed in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light.

Images